WO2016024579A1 - Image processing device, display device, image processing method and image processing program - Google Patents

Image processing device, display device, image processing method and image processing program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016024579A1
WO2016024579A1 PCT/JP2015/072711 JP2015072711W WO2016024579A1 WO 2016024579 A1 WO2016024579 A1 WO 2016024579A1 JP 2015072711 W JP2015072711 W JP 2015072711W WO 2016024579 A1 WO2016024579 A1 WO 2016024579A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
image
age
information
display
control
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/072711
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
邦明 荒金
健二 増田
松村 健一
郁文 閑
純 村井
一男 坪田
Original Assignee
大日本印刷株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2014164587A external-priority patent/JP2016040581A/en
Application filed by 大日本印刷株式会社 filed Critical 大日本印刷株式会社
Priority claimed from JP2015158195A external-priority patent/JP6146443B2/en
Publication of WO2016024579A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016024579A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/02Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators characterised by the way in which colour is displayed
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/10Intensity circuits
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/36Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators characterised by the display of a graphic pattern, e.g. using an all-points-addressable [APA] memory

Definitions

  • the present invention belongs to the technical field of an image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and an image processing program. More specifically, the present invention belongs to a technical field of an image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and a program for the image processing device for protecting the eyes of a user who views a displayed image.
  • Patent Document 1 listed below is an example of a patent document that discloses such an optical component that has such an antiglare effect, is effective in reducing fatigue and preventing eye diseases, and has good visibility.
  • the optical component disclosed in Patent Document 1 light of a specific wavelength (hereinafter, simply referred to as “blue light”, the wavelength is about 400 to 500 nanometers) is reduced, thereby preventing glare.
  • blue light the wavelength is about 400 to 500 nanometers
  • the optical component is configured to reduce blue light irradiated to the eye by attaching it to a display device (or attaching the optical component in a lens shape to spectacles and viewing through the lens). ing.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2 research results have been reported that the blue light affects the internal rhythm of a person viewing a liquid crystal display using the LED as a backlight. Has been. Therefore, in this case, the blue light is not always reduced, but it is considered that the on / off of the blue light should be appropriately switched according to the time zone, and the reduction rate in the case of reduction should be switched.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and one example of the problem is to maintain and adjust the internal rhythm and the like through vision of a person viewing a display that generates blue light.
  • An image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and a program for the image processing device are provided.
  • an image information acquisition unit such as a switching control unit that acquires image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on a display unit such as a display, time, date
  • a time information acquisition means such as a time acquisition unit for acquiring time information indicating either the month or the season, and a luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information
  • Processing means such as a pixel value update unit that controls to generate display image information and output and display the information on the display means.
  • an invention according to claim 15 acquires the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 14 and the display image information, and performs the display. And the display means for displaying an image corresponding to the image information for use.
  • the invention according to claim 16 corresponds to an image to be displayed on the display means in an image processing method executed in an image processing apparatus connected to display means such as a display.
  • An image information acquisition step for acquiring image information a time information acquisition step for acquiring time information indicating any of time, day, month, or season, and a luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information.
  • the invention described in claim 17 is directed to a computer included in an image processing apparatus connected to a display unit such as a display, and displays image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display unit.
  • the image information acquisition means to acquire, the time information acquisition means to acquire time information indicating any of time, day, month or season, and the luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information Then, control is performed based on the information, display image information is generated, and it is made to function as processing means for outputting and displaying on the display means.
  • the luminance corresponding to any one of the color components in the image information is controlled based on the time information to display the display image information. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily maintain / adjust the internal rhythm and the like of the person who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display image information.
  • the invention according to claim 2 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the processing means based on the acquired time information, the blue component in the acquired image information
  • the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance corresponding to.
  • the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the acquired image information based on the time information. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain / adjust the in-vivo rhythm and the like by appropriately controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component that is likely to affect the in-vivo rhythm and the like of the person viewing the image.
  • the invention according to claim 3 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the processing means, based on the acquired time information, has the luminance corresponding to the blue component. Therefore, the luminance in the activity time of the person viewing the image displayed on the display means corresponding to the display image information is relatively higher than the luminance in the time other than the activity time. To display the image information for display.
  • the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the activity time of the person viewing the image is higher than the luminance at other times. Since it is controlled to be high, the internal rhythm during the active time and other times can be maintained / adjusted satisfactorily.
  • the invention according to claim 4 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the processing means is indicated by the acquired time information.
  • the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance based on at least one of the sunrise time and sunset time.
  • a color component based on at least one of sunrise time or sunset time is generated by controlling the brightness of the image, so by displaying the image of the color component in accordance with the change in the daily rhythm of the person viewing the image, the internal rhythm and the like can be better displayed. Can be maintained / adjusted.
  • the invention according to claim 5 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the control mode of the luminance in the processing means is specified. And a processing unit for generating the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and the specified control mode. Configured to do.
  • the brightness control mode specified by the specifying means and the time information Since the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance of the color component based on the luminance, the luminance can be controlled according to the preference of the person viewing the image, and the body rhythm is maintained / adjusted according to the person concerned. be able to.
  • the invention according to claim 6 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 5, wherein, when the control mode is designated, the display means changes the time change of the luminance to be controlled.
  • the designating means is used for designating the control mode by changing the shape of part or all of the displayed graph.
  • the processing means is configured to generate the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and a control mode designated using the graph.
  • the luminance control mode when the luminance control mode is designated, a graph corresponding to the time change of the luminance is displayed. Since the control mode is specified by changing the shape of the part or the whole, the brightness can be easily controlled according to the preference of the person viewing the image, etc., and the body rhythm etc. can be maintained / adjusted according to the person concerned Can do.
  • position information indicating the position of the display means is acquired.
  • Position information acquisition means such as a position acquisition unit is further provided, and the time information acquisition means is configured to acquire the time information corresponding to the position indicated by the acquired position information.
  • time information corresponding to the position of the display means indicated by the position information is acquired. Therefore, the internal rhythm and the like can be maintained / adjusted more appropriately according to the position.
  • the invention according to claim 8 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the age-related information corresponding to the age of the person viewing the displayed image is acquired. Further comprising age-corresponding information acquisition means such as a data acquisition unit, wherein the processing means reduces the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image based on the acquired age-corresponding information, and based on the age-corresponding information Display image information is generated from the image information and output to the display means for display.
  • age-corresponding information acquisition means such as a data acquisition unit
  • the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image is reduced based on the age-corresponding information, and based on the age-corresponding information.
  • Display image information is generated from the image information. Therefore, it is possible to display an image in an easy-to-see state according to the age of the person who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display image information and protecting the eyes of the person.
  • the invention according to claim 9 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the processing means (i) reduces the luminance based on the acquired age correspondence information. (Ii) contrast correction processing for correcting contrast in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information, and (iii) color correction for correcting color in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information.
  • the processes any one of the processes including the reduction process is performed on the acquired image information to generate the display image information.
  • the generation means includes any one of the reduction process, the contrast correction process, and the color correction process including the reduction process. Processing is performed on the image information to generate display image information. Therefore, the image can be displayed by multifaceted processing while being easy to see according to the age of the person viewing the image and effectively protecting the eyes of the person.
  • the invention according to claim 10 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the age corresponding to the acquired age correspondence information indicates in advance a child or an adult.
  • the processing means performs the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or higher than a reduction threshold set in advance corresponding to the age threshold, and the contrast correction is performed.
  • the contrast correction process that is equal to or lower than a correction threshold set in advance corresponding to the age threshold is executed.
  • the reduction in luminance is equal to or more than the reduction threshold.
  • a certain reduction process and a contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or less than the correction threshold are executed. Therefore, it is possible to protect an eye of a child or an adult and display an image with a contrast that is easy to see.
  • the invention according to claim 11 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the age corresponding to the acquired age-corresponding information is preset to indicate an adult.
  • the processing means performs the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or greater than a preset reduction threshold corresponding to the age range threshold, and the contrast correction is the age.
  • the contrast correction process that is greater than or equal to a preset correction threshold value corresponding to the width threshold value and the luminance correction process that reduces the luminance of the entire image corresponding to the age width threshold value are configured to be executed.
  • the luminance reduction is equal to or greater than the reduction threshold.
  • Reduction processing, contrast correction processing in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than the correction threshold value, and luminance correction processing for reducing the luminance of the entire image corresponding to the age width threshold value Therefore, it is possible to protect an adult's eyes and to display an image with easy-to-see contrast and image brightness.
  • the invention according to claim 12 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the person is an older person than an age threshold set in advance as indicating an elderly person. And when the acquired age-corresponding information indicates that the person suffers from a preset eye disease, the processing means reduces the brightness by a preset reduction.
  • the reduction process that is equal to or less than a threshold value, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than a preset correction threshold value, and the color correction process that corrects the color based on the acquired age-corresponding information. Configured to do.
  • the person viewing the image is an elderly person having a predetermined age threshold or more, and the person is a predetermined eye disease.
  • the color is corrected based on the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or less than the reduction threshold, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than the correction threshold, and the age correspondence information Execute color correction processing. Therefore, an image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state for the elderly.
  • the invention according to claim 13 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 8 to 12, wherein the age-corresponding information acquisition unit newly adds the age-corresponding information.
  • the processing unit When the information is acquired, the processing unit generates any of the display image information by executing any one of the processes including the reduction process on the acquired image information based on the new age-corresponding information. Configured to do.
  • any process including a reduction process based on new age correspondence information Is executed to generate display image information, so that even when new age-corresponding information can be acquired, it is easy to see according to the age of the person viewing the image and while protecting the eyes of the person, An image can be displayed appropriately.
  • an invention according to claim 14 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the color component is RGB (Red Green Blue) color. Any one of the color components in the space, or any one of the color components in the hue in the color space composed of three elements including the hue and the saturation.
  • RGB Red Green Blue
  • the color component is any color component or hue in the RGB color space. And any one of the color components in the hue in the color space composed of three elements including the saturation, so that the image corresponding to the display image information is visually recognized for the color components of the widely used color space. It is possible to maintain / adjust the rhythm etc. of the body through vision.
  • the luminance corresponding to any color component in the image information is controlled based on the time information to generate and display the display image information.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of the calendar information based on the principle of 1st Embodiment.
  • figure (I) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment.
  • figure (II) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment.
  • figure (III) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment.
  • FIG IV illustrates the control aspect in the day of the blue light based on the principle of 1st Embodiment.
  • figure (V) which illustrates the control aspect in one day of the blue light based on the principle of 1st Embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a display device according to a first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is a figure which illustrates the reduction process of the intensity
  • FIG. 1 It is a figure which illustrates a setting screen etc. in control processing concerning a 1st embodiment
  • (a) is a figure which illustrates the setting screen
  • (b) is a figure showing the 1st example of the setting
  • c) is a diagram showing a second example of the setting.
  • (I) which illustrates setting in control processing concerning a 1st embodiment
  • (a) is a figure showing the 3rd example of the setting
  • (b) is a figure showing the 4th example of the setting. is there.
  • FIG. II which illustrates the setting in the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment
  • (a) is a figure which shows the 5th example of the said setting
  • (b) is a figure which shows the 6th example of the said setting. is there.
  • (a) is a figure which shows another 1st example
  • (b) is a figure which shows another 2nd example.
  • It is a figure (I) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment (a) is a figure which shows the concept of HLS color space
  • (b) is a figure which shows the concept of HSV color space.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of calendar information according to the principle of the first embodiment
  • FIGS. 2 to 7 are diagrams illustrating examples of a blue light day control mode according to the principle of the first embodiment. is there.
  • the blue light is not harmful and should not always be reduced, and the blue light emitted from the display visually recognized by the person is displayed on the person's day, Control is performed based on the time so as to match changes in the internal rhythm (life rhythm) or the like in the time of the month or season.
  • the intensity of the blue light during the time when the person is awake and active is higher than the intensity of the blue light during the time when the person is sleeping or resting according to the above time. Control the intensity.
  • the internal rhythm etc. through the visual sense of the person who visually recognizes the image displayed on the display emitting blue light whose intensity is controlled as described above are favorably maintained or adjusted.
  • calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1 is used as the time serving as a reference for controlling the intensity of the blue light.
  • the calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1 is disclosed, for example, at the National Astronomical Observatory of Japan, and includes the time of sunrise, south China for each geographical location (Tokyo in the case illustrated in FIG. 1) and for each month of the year. Each of the time and sunset time is included for reference.
  • the intensity of the blue light is controlled for each day, for example, in correspondence with each time included in the calendar information. More specifically, in the present invention, based on the calendar information, control is performed so that the intensity of the blue light increases in a time zone in which a person is estimated to be active and active. In other words, the control is performed so that the intensity of the blue light is lowered in the time zone in which the person is estimated to be sleeping or resting.
  • the time period for controlling the intensity of blue light is relatively long based on the calendar information.
  • the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is reduced is controlled according to the time as shown in FIG.
  • the time zone that is controlled so that the reduction rate of the intensity of blue light is increased is indicated by lower left hatching
  • the time zone that is controlled so that the reduction rate is intermediate is indicated by vertical and horizontal hatching.
  • the time zone for controlling the reduction rate to be small is indicated by lower right hatching
  • the time zone for controlling the blue light intensity not to be reduced (that is, the reduction rate is set to 0) is indicated by vertical hatching. Yes.
  • the intensity of blue light is controlled to be relatively low based on the calendar information as illustrated in FIG.
  • the degree of reduction of the intensity of blue light is controlled according to the time, while the time zone to be used is relatively shortened. Further, for March, April, September, and October between the period illustrated in FIG. 2 and the period illustrated in FIG. 3, as illustrated in FIG.
  • the time zone in which the intensity of the light is controlled to be relatively low is set in the middle of the case illustrated in FIG. 2 and the case illustrated in FIG. 3, and the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is reduced is as shown in FIG. Control according to.
  • the time zone in which the intensity of blue light is controlled to be relatively high based on the calendar information As shown in FIG. 5, the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is relatively increased is controlled according to the time. 5 to 7, the time zone for controlling the blue light intensity reduction rate to be relatively large is shown without hatching, and the time zone for controlling the reduction rate to be relatively small is shown. It is indicated by dot hatching, and the time zone for controlling to increase the intensity of blue light by decreasing the enhancement rate relatively is indicated by horizontal hatching, and the intensity of blue light is increased by increasing the enhancement rate relatively. The time zone to be controlled is indicated by vertical hatching.
  • the time for controlling the intensity of the blue light relatively low based on the calendar information.
  • the degree of increasing the intensity of blue light while controlling the band relatively is controlled according to the time as shown in FIG. Further, for March, April, September, and October between the period illustrated in FIG. 5 and the period illustrated in FIG. 6, as illustrated in FIG.
  • the time zone in which the light intensity is controlled to be relatively low is about the middle of the case illustrated in FIG. 5 and the case illustrated in FIG. 6, and the degree of increasing the intensity of the blue light is as shown in FIG. Control according to.
  • FIGS. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the display device according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a control process according to the first embodiment
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the control process.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of the control process.
  • 12 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen or the like in the control process according to the first embodiment.
  • FIGS. 13 and 14 are diagrams illustrating examples of the setting in the control process.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the control process. It is a figure which shows another specific example.
  • the blue light intensity control process according to the first embodiment is simply referred to as “control process according to the first embodiment”.
  • the display device D1 is switched between an image generation unit 1, a control unit 2 including a CPU, a ROM (Read Only Memory), a RAM (Random Access Memory), and the like.
  • the control unit 3 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like having a backlight that is an LED that generates (emits) blue light, and a recording medium such as a hard disk, and records a control rate table, which will be described later, in a nonvolatile manner.
  • the input unit 9 that generates an operation signal Sop that specifies processing as the display device D1, and the time at the position indicated by the position data Spos A time acquisition unit 10 for acquiring data St, and is made of.
  • the display 4 corresponds to an example of the “display unit” according to the present invention
  • the switching control unit 3 corresponds to an example of the “image information acquisition unit” according to the present invention
  • the time acquisition unit 10 correspond to the present invention. This corresponds to an example of “time information acquisition means”.
  • the pixel value update unit 6 corresponds to an example of a “processing unit” according to the present invention
  • the input unit 9 corresponds to an example of a “designating unit” according to the present invention
  • the position detection unit 8 includes “ This corresponds to an example of “position information acquisition means”.
  • the image generation unit 1 generates image information Sin corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display 4 (including at least one of a still image and a moving image; the same applies hereinafter) and outputs the image information Sin to the switching control unit 3.
  • the recording unit 5 is a preset control rate table for the control processing according to the first embodiment, and includes a control rate table including at least a reduction rate parameter used when controlling the blue component in the image. Non-volatile recording is performed (n is a natural number, the same applies hereinafter). Each control rate table will be described in detail later.
  • the input unit 9 receives a signal indicating whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment based on a user operation, and the control rate table used for the control process when the control process is executed.
  • An operation signal Sop including a signal for designating is generated and output to the control unit 2.
  • the image displayed on the display 4 is, for example, an image corresponding to a movie
  • an operation for not executing the control processing according to the first embodiment is performed in the input unit 9 in order to maintain the image quality and the like. Is preferred.
  • the control process is performed in order to effectively control the intensity of the blue light by the control process according to the first embodiment.
  • an operation to be executed is performed in the input unit 9. Further, when executing the control processing according to the first embodiment, the control rate (that is, the enhancement rate when the intensity of blue light is enhanced, and the reduction rate when the intensity of blue light is reduced).
  • the operation signal Sop that reflects the operation of selecting (to be) is generated / output.
  • the other position detection unit 8 generates the position data Spos based on, for example, automatic detection using GPS (Global Positioning System) or user input operation, and outputs the position data Spos to the control unit 2. Further, the time acquisition unit 10 acquires time data St indicating the current time from a timer (not shown), for example, and outputs it to the control unit 2. In this case, the time acquisition unit 10 may acquire time data St indicating a time specified by the user other than the current time, for example, other than the current time, and output the time data St to the control unit 2.
  • GPS Global Positioning System
  • the control unit 2 executes the on / off signal indicating whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment, and the control process based on the operation signal Sop, the position data Spos, and the time data St.
  • a control signal Sc including a table designating signal for designating the control rate table used for the control process is generated.
  • the control unit 2 determines the position and time based on the position indicated by the position data Spos (for example, Tokyo) and the time indicated by the time data St.
  • the table specifying signal for specifying the corresponding control rate table is generated. Thereafter, the control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7, and outputs the table designation signal to the recording unit 5.
  • the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and if so, the image information Sin. Is output to the pixel value update unit 6. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed, the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the switching unit 7 as it is.
  • the recording unit 5 outputs the control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal from the control unit 2 to the pixel value updating unit 6.
  • the pixel value update unit 6 causes the pixel values of the red component, the blue component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 (more specifically, for example, luminance ) Is updated to the pixel value indicated by the control rate table output from the recording unit 5 and output to the switching unit 7 as updated image information Sbc.
  • the upper limit value of the pixel value is determined by the number of gradations, and when the display 4 is configured by a liquid crystal display, if the display 4 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space, the upper limit value is set. Is “255 (2 8 ⁇ 1)” for each of the three color components, and an upper limit value of “63 (2 6 -6)” for each of the three color components is an 18-bit liquid crystal display using the same color space. -1) ".
  • the switching unit 7 displays the image information Sin from the switching control unit 3 as it is as display information Sout when the control processing according to the first embodiment is not performed based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2. 4 is output.
  • the updated image information Sbc from the pixel value update unit 6 is output to the display 4 as display information Sout.
  • the display 4 displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout output from the switching unit 7.
  • the intensity of the blue light in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is adjusted by the color adjustment processing as the display device D1 without separately using the special optical component described as the background art. Control according to time.
  • the “reduction rate” and “enhancement rate” in the following description are “1” for each pixel value of the input image (image information Sin) when the control processing according to the first embodiment is not performed. Is a parameter defined by
  • Reduction rate [%] ⁇ 1 ⁇ (output pixel value / input pixel value) ⁇ ⁇ 100
  • Enhancement rate [%] ⁇ (output pixel value / input pixel value) ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ 100
  • the first embodiment In the blue light intensity reduction processing (hereinafter simply referred to as “reduction processing” in the first embodiment) in the control processing according to FIG. 9, the original image indicated by the broken line in FIG. 9 (that is, the image corresponding to the image information Sin).
  • the reduction rate of the blue component shown as “B” in FIG. 9) is different from that of the other color components (red component (shown as “R” in FIG. 9A)) and green component (shown in FIG. 9A).
  • the pixel value updating unit 6 updates the luminance of each color component so as to be larger than the reduction rate of “G”)), and outputs the updated image information Sbc to the switching unit 7.
  • This reduction process is executed for each pixel, for example.
  • the wavelength of the blue component is, for example, about 440 nanometers to 490 nanometers
  • the wavelength of the red component is, for example, about 620 nanometers to 740 nanometers
  • the wavelength of the green component is, for example, about 500 nanometers to It is about 600 nanometers. Further, in FIG.
  • FIG. 9A it is possible to reduce only the blue component, but in that case, the color of the entire image changes (more specifically, yellowish), It is not preferable as the display device D1. Therefore, in the reduction process according to the first embodiment, not only the blue component but also the red component and the green component are reduced as illustrated in FIG. Thereby, harmful blue light can be reduced while suppressing a change in color of the entire image. At this time, depending on the content of the image, the above-described reduction of only the blue component may be performed (in other words, the reduction rate in each of the red component and the green component is zero (the red component and the green component are not reduced). ) If possible.
  • the display device D1 can make this possible by selecting a control rate table for reducing only the blue component.
  • the reduction processing is performed, for example, a so-called HLS (Hue, Luminance, Saturation) color space, HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) color space, or a YCbCr color space including luminance (Y). The same applies to the above.
  • the horizontal axis is the input pixel value as in FIG. 9A, and the vertical axis
  • the blue light intensity enhancement process (hereinafter simply referred to as “enhancement process” in the first embodiment) in the control process according to the first embodiment
  • the pixel value updating unit 6 updates the luminance of the blue component so that the blue component is larger than the original image, and outputs the updated image information Sbc to the switching unit 7.
  • This enhancement process is also executed for each pixel, for example, in the same manner as the reduction process.
  • the first control rate table T1, the second control rate table T2, the third control rate table T3,..., And the nth control rate table Tn are recorded in advance.
  • the “control rate” includes both the blue component reduction rate when the reduction process is executed and the blue component enhancement rate when the enhancement process is executed.
  • each of the control rate parameters in the control rate table for each day and time is based on the calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1, and the control processing according to the first embodiment for one day is illustrated in any of FIGS.
  • the control mode is a value that is executed for each season. The actual values of these control rate parameters can be determined in advance experimentally or empirically based on the calendar information.
  • control process shown in FIG. 10 is started, for example, from the timing when the power switch of the display device D1 is turned on, and is executed mainly with the control unit 2 as the center.
  • the control process according to the first embodiment first, the position (of the display 4) indicated by the position data Spos from the position detection unit 8 and the time data St from the time acquisition unit 10 are used.
  • the indicated date and time is acquired (step S1).
  • the control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal as the control signal Sc to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7 and controls the control process used when the control process according to the first embodiment is executed.
  • a control signal Sc including the table designating signal for designating the rate table is output to the recording unit 5.
  • step S2 when the image information Sin is input from the image generation unit 1, it is first taken into the switching control unit 3 (step S2). Then, the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2 (step S3).
  • step S3 step S3; YES
  • step S3 step S3; YES
  • step S3 step S3; NO
  • the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the switching unit 7 (step S6).
  • the recording unit 5 selects a control rate table (in other words, specifies a reduction rate or an enhancement rate) indicated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 (step S4).
  • the control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal is output to the pixel value update unit 6.
  • the pixel value update unit 6 outputs the pixel values of the blue component, the red component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 from the recording unit 5.
  • the pixel value indicated by the control rate table is updated (step S5), and the updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7.
  • the switching unit 7 switches between the switching control unit 3 side and the pixel value updating unit 6 side based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and outputs and displays the display information Sout on the display 4 (step). S6).
  • the display 4 is used at that time based on the time of day (horizontal axis in FIG. 11), for example, as illustrated in FIG.
  • the intensity of the blue component in the case (vertical axis in FIG. 11) changes in the manner illustrated in FIGS. 2 to 7 based on the calendar information illustrated in FIG.
  • “o” around 0:00 indicates the intensity of the blue component set based on the sunset time of the previous day and the sunrise time of the day in the calendar information
  • “o” around 6 o'clock indicates the calendar information.
  • ⁇ near 18:00 indicates the intensity of the blue component at a time corresponding to the sunset time of the day in the calendar information
  • ⁇ near 12:00 indicates Indicate the intensity of the blue component at the time corresponding to the time of the day in the calendar information.
  • the circle around 24:00 indicates the blue component set based on the sunset time of the day and the sunrise time of the next day in the calendar information. Indicates strength.
  • the control rate of the blue component of the day is automatically controlled according to the time.
  • the user may arbitrarily specify the intensity of the blue component at the input unit 9. More specifically, for example, considering that the purpose of the control processing according to the first embodiment is maintenance / adjustment of the internal rhythm, etc., the set time period recommended for the enhancement, reduction, non-change, etc. of the blue component
  • the user can be presented with the options and the user can specify the time zone during which the enhancement process or the reduction process is performed according to his / her own life pattern and the like, and the degree of the enhancement or reduction. That is, for example, “The time from wake-up is increased by about XX% and the time before bedtime is reduced by about ⁇ %” is suggested as a recommended setting, and the user selects an adjustment time from the recommended settings.
  • a user interface is preferable.
  • the interface screen SG including the change in the intensity of the blue component of the day corresponding to the control rate table is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12A, it is displayed on the display 4.
  • a graph including, for example, ⁇ indicating the intensity of the blue component indicated by the control rate table corresponding to the interface screen SG every two hours is displayed.
  • a cursor C operated when changing the intensity ( ⁇ ) of the blue component at each time is also displayed.
  • a legend NT indicating that the user can arbitrarily change the intensity of the blue component at each time by an operation on the input unit 9 using the cursor C is also displayed.
  • the ⁇ indicating the intensity of the blue component at each time is the direction in which the intensity is changed (the vertical direction in FIG. 12A in the interface screen SG) or the intensity. It is indicated by a broken line double-pointed arrow that it can move in any of the directions for changing the time (that is, the horizontal direction in FIG. 12A on the interface screen SG).
  • the user has, as a first example, the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table is around 18:00.
  • the user when the user displays the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12B on the display 4, the user operates, for example, a mouse (not shown) constituting the input unit 9 to intensify the blue component at 16:00.
  • the cursor C is moved to the position of the point P2 indicating.
  • the user moves the cursor C to the position corresponding to about 18 o'clock in the right direction as indicated by a broken line arrow in FIG. Move.
  • the intensity of the original 16 o'clock blue component illustrated by the dashed point P2 in FIG. 12B is changed to that of the blue component around 18 o'clock illustrated by the solid point P2 in FIG. It is specified to be strength.
  • the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the other points P1, P3, and P4 in the vicinity of the point P2 as illustrated in FIG. 12B, the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 is illustrated.
  • the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the points P1, P3, and P4 is changed so that the entire curve indicating the change in intensity of the blue component maintains a smooth change. Is preferred.
  • a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant).
  • the intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant).
  • the description content (control rate parameter) of the control rate table corresponding to the intensity of the blue component after change illustrated in FIG. 12B or FIG. 12C is recorded in the recording unit 5 and is used in the first embodiment. It is provided for the control processing concerning.
  • the user shifts the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table (shifts the time).
  • the user moves the cursor to the position of the point P2 indicating the intensity of the blue component at 16:00, for example, by operating the mouse while the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. Move C.
  • the cursor C is moved downward to the position of the intensity of the desired blue component as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG.
  • FIG. 13A is changed to the intensity of the (weak) blue component illustrated by the solid line point P2 in FIG. 13A.
  • the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 point P2
  • a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant).
  • the intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant).
  • strength of the blue component after the change illustrated to FIG. 13A or FIG. 13B is recorded on the recording part 5, and 1st Embodiment It is provided for the control processing concerning.
  • the user decreases the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table as a third example, and Suppose that it is desired to shift the weakened strength to a strength around 18:00.
  • the user moves the cursor to the position of the point P2 indicating the intensity of the blue component at 16:00, for example, by operating the mouse while the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. Move C.
  • the point P2 is moved to the position corresponding to about 18 o'clock and moved to the position corresponding to the intensity of the desired blue component.
  • the cursor C is moved obliquely in the lower right direction as indicated by the broken line arrow in FIG.
  • the intensity of the original 16 o'clock blue component illustrated by the dashed point P2 in FIG. 14A is (weak) around 18 o'clock illustrated by the solid point P2 in FIG. 14A.
  • the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the other points P1 and P3 in the vicinity of the point P2 as illustrated in FIG. 14A, the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 (point P2).
  • a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant).
  • the intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line ⁇ the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant).
  • the description content (control rate parameter) of the control rate table corresponding to the intensity of the changed blue component illustrated in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B is recorded in the recording unit 5 and is used in the first embodiment. It is provided for the control processing concerning.
  • control processing for each color component can be performed by setting / recording a control rate table similar to that of the first embodiment for each color component.
  • the brightness corresponding to any color component in the image information Sin is controlled based on the control rate table corresponding to the time, and the updated image information Sbc and Since the display information Sout is generated, it is possible to satisfactorily maintain the internal rhythm and the like of the user who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display information Sout.
  • the updated image information Sbc and the display information Sout are generated by mainly controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image information Sin, the luminance corresponding to the blue component that is likely to affect the internal rhythm and the like. Can be appropriately controlled to maintain the internal rhythm and the like satisfactorily.
  • the control modes illustrated in FIGS. 2 to 7 are changed to the horizontal axis in FIGS. It is preferable to execute the control processing according to the first embodiment by the control mode upside down in FIG.
  • FIGS. 11 to 15 for example, when the luminance of the color component is controlled based on at least one of the sunrise time and the sunset time in the calendar information illustrated in FIG.
  • the internal rhythm can be adjusted more favorably.
  • the luminance control modes illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 15 when the user is a night worker, for example, the luminance control modes illustrated in FIGS. It is preferable to execute the control processing according to the first embodiment by the control mode upside down in FIG.
  • the luminance when the user inputs the luminance control mode of the color component using the input unit 9, the luminance can be controlled according to the preference of the user who visually recognizes the image, and the body is adapted to the user. Rhythm etc. can be adjusted. Furthermore, when the interface screen SG including the graph corresponding to the temporal change of the intensity of the blue component as illustrated in FIGS. 12 to 14 is displayed on the display 4 and the intensity is changed, the user viewing the image The luminance can be easily controlled according to the preference and the like, and the internal rhythm and the like can be maintained / adjusted by the user.
  • the luminance of the color component is controlled based on the calendar information corresponding to the position of the display 4 indicated by the position data Spos and the time data St, the internal rhythm and the like are adjusted more appropriately according to the position. be able to.
  • FIGS. 16 to 20 are diagrams for explaining the principle and the like of the second embodiment
  • FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device according to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 22 is a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing concerning.
  • the blue light intensity control process according to the second embodiment is simply referred to as “control process according to the second embodiment”.
  • the control process is performed on an HLS color space, an HSV color space, or a YCbCr color space including luminance (Y).
  • the RGB color space is converted to a color space such as an HLS color space or an HSV color space, and not only the three primary colors of R, G, and B but also cyan, magenta, and yellow are considered.
  • the reduction rate or the enhancement rate is controlled for each color space to efficiently control the intensity of the blue light, and the image is reconverted into the RGB color space and displayed on the display. More specifically, as a second embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is implemented using the above HLS color space or HSV color space will be described.
  • HLS color space and the HSV color space are color spaces that are generally known together with the RGB color space according to the first embodiment for image processing.
  • the HLS color space used for the reduction processing according to the second embodiment includes a hue (Hue) axis H, a luminance (Luminance) axis L, and saturation. (Saturation)
  • the axis S is constituted.
  • the hue axis H is an axis representing the so-called “color” with an angle in the range of 0 degrees to 360 degrees, and as illustrated in FIG. 16A, the R (red) component and the G (green) component.
  • a C (Cyan) component, an M (Magenta) component, and a Y (Yellow) component are included.
  • 0 degree is the R component
  • 180 degrees located on the opposite side on the hue axis H is a blue-green component corresponding to the opposite color of the R component. If such an HLS color space is used, it is easy to obtain a so-called opposite color.
  • the wavelength of the B component in the HLS color space is, for example, about 440 nanometers to 490 nanometers similarly to the blue component in the RGB color space
  • the wavelength of the R component is, for example, 620 similarly to the red component in the RGB color space
  • the wavelength of the G component is, for example, about 500 to 600 nanometers, similar to the green component in the RGB color space.
  • the C component is a component composed of the G component and the B component
  • the M component is a component composed of the R component and the B component
  • the Y component is composed of the R component and the G component. It is the component which consists of.
  • the saturation axis S represents “color vividness” in a range from 0% (center axis itself) to 100% (outermost circumference), considering the distance from the luminance axis L (center axis of the HLS color space). It is an axis to express, and the fact that the saturation falls from the pure color is a concept based on the idea of approaching gray.
  • the luminance axis L is an axis representing “brightness of color” in a range of 0% to 100%
  • luminance 0% (the bottom end in FIG. 16A) is “black”
  • luminance 100% ( In FIG. 16A, the uppermost end) is “white”
  • the middle (the position of the disk representing the hue axis H) is 50%, representing a pure color.
  • the HSV color space used for the control processing according to the second embodiment includes a hue (Hue) axis H and a lightness (or luminance) (Value) axis. It is constituted by V and a saturation axis S.
  • the hue axis H is basically the same axis as the hue axis H of the HLS color space, and the color type is represented by an angle in the range of 0 to 360 degrees, and the R component, the G component, and the B component.
  • a C component, an M component, and a Y component are included.
  • the saturation axis S is set to a distance from the lightness axis V (the central axis of the HSV color space) from 0% (the central axis itself) to 100. % (Outermost circumference) is the axis representing “color vividness”.
  • the lightness axis V is an axis representing “brightness of color” in the range of 0% to 100%, similar to the luminance axis L of the HLS color space.
  • the brightness axis V indicates how much brightness is lost from a pure color with a brightness of 100%
  • the brightness axis L of the HLS color space is “black” with 0% brightness as described above.
  • white has a luminance of 100% and an intermediate luminance of 50% is a pure color.
  • the blue light intensity reduction process according to the second embodiment with respect to white (achromatic color) in the HLS color space (hereinafter referred to simply as “second embodiment” in the second embodiment).
  • the luminance is reduced from, for example, the level of the broken line ⁇ to the level of the solid line ⁇ on the luminance axis L, as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG.
  • the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HLS color space
  • the level of only the B component on the hue axis H is exemplified by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG.
  • the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is performed on white (achromatic color) in the HSV color space, the case of the HLS color space as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG.
  • the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is applied to the B component of the HSV color space, as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG. 18B, this is the same as in the case of the HLS color space.
  • the level of only the B component on the hue axis H it is possible to reduce blue light while suppressing changes in the overall color tone by reducing the effect on other color components. is there.
  • the blue light intensity enhancement process according to the second embodiment with respect to white (achromatic color) in the HLS color space (hereinafter referred to simply as “second implementation” in the second embodiment).
  • second implementation in the second embodiment, the blue light intensity enhancement process according to the second embodiment with respect to white (achromatic color) in the HLS color space (hereinafter referred to simply as “second implementation” in the second embodiment).
  • the luminance is increased on the luminance axis L from the level of the broken line ⁇ to the level of the solid line ⁇ , for example.
  • the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HLS color space
  • the level of only the B component on the hue axis H is exemplified by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG.
  • the influence on other color components for example, the C component and the M component
  • the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on white (achromatic) in the HSV color space, the case of the HLS color space, as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG.
  • the blue light can be enhanced without changing the color on the display.
  • the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HSV color space, as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG. 20B, this is the same as in the case of the HLS color space.
  • the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HSV color space, as illustrated by the broken line ⁇ and the solid line ⁇ in FIG. 20B, this is the same as in the case of the HLS color space.
  • it is possible to enhance the blue light while suppressing the change in color on the entire display by reducing the influence on other color components. is there.
  • the display device D2 includes an image generation unit 1, a control unit 2, and a switching control unit 3 having the same configuration and functions as those of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the recording unit 5, the switching unit 7, the position detection unit 8, the input unit 9, and the time acquisition unit 10 the pixel value update unit 60 according to the second embodiment and the color space according to the second embodiment.
  • the conversion unit 61 and the color space inverse conversion unit 62 according to the second embodiment are configured.
  • the control rate table recorded in the recording unit 5 is a preset control rate table for the control processing according to the second embodiment using the HLS color space, and It differs from the recording unit 5 of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment in that it is a control rate table including at least a control rate parameter used when reducing or enhancing components. Even in this case, similarly to the control processing according to the first embodiment, the blue light in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is removed by the color adjustment processing as the display device D2 without using the special optical component separately. There is no change to control.
  • the image information Sin output from the image generation unit 1 corresponds to the RGB color space as in the case of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment. Includes color data and the like.
  • the control unit 2 executes the control process according to the second embodiment based on the operation signal Sop from the input unit 9, the position data Spos from the position detection unit 8, and the time data St from the time acquisition unit 10.
  • a control signal Sc each including an on / off signal indicating whether to perform the control process and a table designating signal for designating the control rate table used in the control process when the control process is performed.
  • control unit 2 executes the control process according to the second embodiment, the position indicated by the position data Spos, and the time indicated by the time data St.
  • the table designation signal for designating a control rate table (control rate table for HLS color space) corresponding to the position and time is generated based on the above.
  • control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7, and outputs the table designation signal to the recording unit 5.
  • the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the second embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and if so, the image information Sin. Is output to the color space conversion unit 61. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed, the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the switching unit 7 as it is.
  • the color space conversion unit 61 converts the color space corresponding to the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 from the RGB color space to the HLS color space, and converts the image information Sin corresponding to the converted HLS color space to the pixel. Output to the value update unit 60. Note that the color space conversion processing (conversion processing from the RGB color space to the HLS color space) itself in the color space conversion unit 60 is the same as the conventional conversion processing, and thus detailed description is omitted.
  • the reduction rate parameter included in the reduction rate table designated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 is output to the pixel value update unit 60.
  • the pixel value update unit 60 has at least the B component pixel value of the HLS color space (more specifically, for example, luminance) in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the color space conversion unit 61. ) Is updated to the pixel value indicated by the reduction rate table output from the recording unit 5 and output to the color space inverse conversion unit 62 as updated image information Sbc.
  • the update of the pixel value in this case is an update of the pixel value based on the principle illustrated in FIG. 17 or FIG.
  • the color space reverse conversion unit 62 reversely converts the color space corresponding to the updated image information Sbc output from the pixel value update unit 60 from the HLS color space to the original RGB color space, and converts the color space to the RGB color space after the reverse conversion.
  • the corresponding updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7.
  • the color space reverse conversion process inverse conversion process from the HLS color space to the RGB color space itself in the color space reverse conversion unit 62 is the same as the conventional reverse conversion process, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the switching unit 7 displays the image information Sin from the switching control unit 3 as display information Sout as it is when the control processing according to the second embodiment is not performed based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2. 4 is output.
  • the updated image information Sbc from the color space inverse transform unit 62 is output to the display 4 as display information Sout.
  • the display 4 displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout output from the switching unit 7.
  • step S3 the same steps S1 to S3 as the control process according to the first embodiment are executed.
  • step S3 the determination in step S3
  • step S3 the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the color space conversion unit 61.
  • step S3 the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the switching unit 7 (step S6).
  • the color space conversion unit 61 performs the conversion process from the RGB color space to the HLS color space described above on the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3, and the color space is converted into the HLS color space.
  • the image information Sin is output to the pixel value update unit 60 (step S10).
  • the recording unit 5 selects a control rate table (in other words, specifies a reduction rate or an enhancement rate) indicated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 (step S11).
  • the control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal is output to the pixel value update unit 60.
  • the pixel value update unit 60 controls the pixel value of at least the B component of the hue axis H in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the color space conversion unit 61, which is output from the recording unit 5.
  • the pixel value indicated by the rate table is updated (step S12), and the updated image information Sbc is output to the color space inverse transform unit 62.
  • the color space inverse conversion unit 62 performs the above-described reverse conversion processing from the HLS color space to the RGB color space on the updated image information Sbc output from the pixel value update unit 60, and the color space is changed to the RGB color space.
  • the returned updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7 (step S13).
  • the switching unit 7 switches between the switching control unit 3 side and the color space inverse conversion unit 62 side based on the on / off signal and the range designation signal from the control unit 2 and outputs the display information Sout to the display 4. Is displayed (step S6).
  • the luminance control rate corresponding to the B component in the HLS color space corresponds to each luminance component corresponding to each color component other than the B component in the hue axis H.
  • the updated image information Sbc is generated and displayed by controlling the luminance corresponding to the B component so as to be equal to or greater than the control rate. Therefore, the B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) without separately using an optical member or the like that reduces the B component.
  • the saturation on the saturation axis S is set to zero. If the updated image information Sbc is generated by controlling the luminance, it is possible to effectively protect the eyes even for an achromatic color such as a white image. Furthermore, even when the saturation in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is, for example, 10% or less, the control ratios of the luminances corresponding to the B component in the hue and the color components other than the B component in the hue are all omitted.
  • the updated image information Sbc is generated as the same, all the color components in the hue are controlled to be approximately equal, so that, for example, the B component can be controlled while preventing the white color on the display from changing. Ingredients can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) without changes in color.
  • the color tone of the color including white on the display changes.
  • the B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) while preventing this.
  • the control process according to the second embodiment described above the case where the HLS color space is used as the color space has been described. However, the case where the HSV color space described with reference to FIGS. 16B, 18, and 20 is used. However, the control process according to the second embodiment can be executed in exactly the same manner.
  • the color space conversion unit 61 converts the image information Sin from the RGB color space to the HSV color space
  • the color space inverse conversion unit 62 converts the update image information Sbc from the HSV color space to the RGB color space. Inverse conversion processing is performed. In this case, the pixel value is updated based on the principle illustrated in FIG. 18 or FIG.
  • the conversion process itself from the RGB color space to the HSV color space in the color space conversion unit 61 and the reverse conversion process from the HSV color space to the RGB color space in the color space inverse conversion unit 62 are the conventional conversion processes. And the same inverse transformation process.
  • the color space of the image information Sin is converted into either the HLS color space or the HSV color space, and the control processing is executed.
  • the B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) while preventing the color of the material from changing.
  • the second embodiment can also be applied to a so-called La * b * color space, which is a similar color space, and a so-called YCbCr (YUV) color space consisting of luminance and color difference.
  • control processing according to the first embodiment is achieved in that the control processing is performed using the control rate table selected by the operation of the control unit 2 among the control rate tables recorded in the recording unit 5.
  • control processing is performed using the control rate table selected by the operation of the control unit 2 among the control rate tables recorded in the recording unit 5.
  • the same application as the control processing according to the first embodiment is possible.
  • the present invention is applied to an in-vehicle display used for movement guidance of, for example, a vehicle or a bicycle in addition to a stationary display for a personal computer or the like. It is also possible to apply. In this case, it can be used to prevent the driver's sleepiness by enhancing the blue component. In this case, whether or not the vehicle is in operation with time (for example, it is operating as an in-vehicle display) It is conceivable to perform the blue component enhancement processing based on whether or not.
  • control process according to the first embodiment and the control process according to the second embodiment can be configured to be executed not in units of days but in units of months or seasons.
  • a control rate table in this case a monthly or seasonal control rate table is recorded in the recording unit 5 and used.
  • control processing according to each embodiment is uniformly executed on the entire image.
  • a range in the image is designated. It can also be configured to control whether or not to be the target of the control processing according to each embodiment.
  • the intensity of the blue light is controlled according to the day or time.
  • the liquid crystal display or the like is used. Data indicating the age and sex of the user viewing the display is acquired, and based on the data, contrast correction, color correction, and blue light intensity control are performed in the display using the display. In the following description, the age and sex are simply referred to as “age etc.”.
  • the intensity of the blue light in the image is reduced as necessary in accordance with the age of the user.
  • the user's eyes are protected from blue light in an easy-to-view state suitable for the age and so on. While displaying the necessary image.
  • a display state in a display device that includes a display including a liquid crystal display and displays images including moving images and still images (that is, contrast in the image, color, luminance of blue light, etc.)
  • images including moving images and still images (that is, contrast in the image, color, luminance of blue light, etc.)
  • the display state control process according to the third embodiment is simply referred to as a “control process according to the third embodiment”.
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device according to the third embodiment
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a contrast correction process according to the third embodiment
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the control process corresponding to the time of the intensity
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart which shows the control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.
  • the display device D3 includes an image generation unit 20, a control unit 21 including a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, a contrast correction determination unit 22, and the blue light.
  • a display 23 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like having a backlight which is a generated (light emitting) LED, a recording unit 24 configured to record a luminance table or the like described later in a nonvolatile manner, and a contrast correction pixel value.
  • the age data acquisition unit 27 corresponds to an example of “age-related information acquisition unit” according to the present invention
  • the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 corresponds to an example of “processing unit” according to the present invention.
  • the image generation unit 20 generates image information Sin corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display 23 (including at least one of a still image and a moving image; the same applies hereinafter) and supplies the image information to the contrast correction determination unit 22. Output.
  • the recording unit 24 records a plurality of preset various tables for control processing according to the third embodiment in a nonvolatile manner.
  • the intensity correction table used for the contrast correction is recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner.
  • the first intensity correction table TC1 to the nth intensity correction table TCn as the intensity correction table
  • the first color correction table TL1 to the mth color correction as the color correction table.
  • a table TLm (m is a natural number) and a first luminance table TB1 to a p-th luminance table TBp (p is a natural number) as the luminance table are recorded in a nonvolatile manner.
  • the age data acquisition unit 27 acquires the age data Sage and outputs it to the control unit 21.
  • the age data acquisition unit 27 may acquire, for example, the age data Sage input by the user operating an input unit (not shown) from the input unit.
  • the age data acquisition unit 27 acquires, for example, medical chart data corresponding to the medical chart of the hospital where the user is consulted from the hospital via a network such as the Internet, and extracts the age data Sage from the medical chart data. May be output to the control unit 21.
  • the age data acquisition unit 27 estimates / detects the user's age and the like using a face recognition technique similar to the conventional one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
  • the age data Sage shown may be extracted and output to the control unit 21.
  • the time acquisition unit 29 acquires the time data St from a timer (not shown), for example, and outputs it to the control unit 21.
  • the control unit 21 plays an role such as indicating a portion to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment in an image to be displayed on the display 23 based on the age data Sage and the time data St.
  • a control signal Sc including an off signal and a table designating signal for designating the various tables used for the control processing when the control processing is executed is generated.
  • the control unit 21 at the timing when the pixel value of the image information Sin corresponding to the portion to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment is input from the image generation unit 20 in the image to be displayed, the control unit 21 Then, the control signal Sc including the on / off signal which is an on signal is generated.
  • control unit 21 is an off signal at the timing when the pixel value of the image information Sin corresponding to the portion not to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment is input from the image generation unit 20.
  • a control signal Sc including an on / off signal is generated.
  • the image displayed on the display 23 is the target of the control process according to the third embodiment is, for example, the image corresponding to a movie, as in the control process according to the first embodiment. In such a case, the control process according to the third embodiment is not a target of the control process.
  • the control process is preferably performed.
  • the control unit 21 when executing the control processing according to the third embodiment, performs the intensity correction table TC and the color correction table TL based on the age indicated by the age data Sage and the time indicated by the time data St. And the table designation signal for designating the luminance table TB is generated. Thereafter, the control unit 21 outputs the on / off signal indicating the portion of the image to be corrected for contrast to the contrast correction determination unit 22 as a control signal Sc, and selects the portion of the image to be corrected for color.
  • the on / off signal shown is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as a control signal Sc, and the blue light control determination unit 30 uses the on / off signal indicating the part of the image to be controlled by the blue light as the control signal Sc. Further, the table designation signal is outputted as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24.
  • the on / off signal indicating the portion of the image to be subjected to contrast correction is simply referred to as “contrast correction on / off signal” and is to be subjected to color correction.
  • the on / off signal indicating the image portion is simply referred to as “color correction on / off signal”
  • the on / off signal indicating the image portion to be controlled by the blue light is simply referred to as “blue light control on / off”. This is referred to as an “off signal”.
  • the table designation signal for designating the intensity correction table TC is simply referred to as “intensity correction table designation signal”
  • the table designation signal for designating the color correction table TL is simply “color correction table designation signal”.
  • the table designation signal for designating the luminance table TB is simply referred to as “luminance table designation signal”.
  • the contrast correction determination unit 22 Based on the contrast correction on / off signal from the control unit 21, the contrast correction determination unit 22 performs the operation of the control unit 21 on the image information Sin corresponding to the portion of the image that is the target of the contrast correction. For the pixel, the pixel value is output to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25. On the other hand, the pixel value of the pixel of the image information Sin corresponding to a portion other than the contrast correction target portion of the image is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as it is.
  • the recording unit 24 outputs the intensity correction parameters included in the intensity correction table TC specified by the intensity correction table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25.
  • the contrast correction pixel value updating unit 25 for example, the pixel values of the red component, the blue component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the contrast correction determination unit 22 (more specifically, Is updated to the pixel value corresponding to the intensity correction parameter output from the recording unit 24, and the color correction determination is performed as contrast corrected image information Scc in which the contrast is corrected based on the intensity correction parameter.
  • the upper limit value of the pixel value (or luminance value) is determined by the number of gradations, and if the display 23 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space, the upper limit value is set for each of the three color components. “255 (2 8 ⁇ 1)”.
  • the upper limit value is “63 (2 6 ⁇ 1)” for each of the three color components.
  • each color component when the matters common to the red component, the blue component, and the green component are described, they are simply referred to as “each color component”.
  • the control unit 21 designates the intensity correction table TC used for the contrast correction for the pixels of the image information Sin corresponding to the contrast correction target portion of the image displayed on the display 23.
  • the intensity correction table designating signal is output to the recording unit 24.
  • TC2 and a third intensity correction table corresponding to the correction intensity “strong” are set in advance, and intensity correction parameters corresponding to the respective correction intensity tables TC are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner.
  • n is “3”.
  • the relationship between the input pixel value and the output pixel value in each color when the display 23 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space and the contrast is not corrected is the relationship illustrated in FIG.
  • the first correction intensity table TC1 corresponding to the correction intensity “weak” is different from the example illustrated in FIG. 24B (the case illustrated in FIG. 24A, for example).
  • the first correction intensity table TC1 for correcting the contrast is recorded in (b) (see the middle broken arrow).
  • the second correction intensity table TC2 corresponding to the correction intensity “medium” is different from the example illustrated in FIG. 24C (the case illustrated in FIG. 24B, for example).
  • the second correction strength table TC2 for correcting the contrast is recorded in (c) (see the broken line arrow). Furthermore, as the third correction intensity table corresponding to the correction intensity “strong”, for example, the difference from the case illustrated in FIG. 24D (the case illustrated in FIG. 24C) is different from FIG. A third correction intensity table for correcting the contrast is recorded in the middle dashed arrow).
  • the specific correction intensity parameter values included in each correction intensity table TC are preferably set in accordance with, for example, the JIS S0031 standard that defines the spectral luminous efficiency by age.
  • control unit 21 generates the correction intensity table designation signal for designating the intensity correction table TC corresponding to the age or the like based on the age or the like indicated by the age data Sage for the contrast correction. To do.
  • the control unit 21 turns off the contrast correction itself (that is, generates the contrast correction on / off signal corresponding to the off signal and outputs it to the contrast correction determination unit 22), or sets the intensity of the correction.
  • a correction intensity table designation signal for designating the first correction intensity table TC1 to generate “weak” is generated and output to the recording unit 24.
  • the control unit 21 turns off the contrast correction itself or generates a correction intensity table designation signal for designating the first correction intensity table TC1 to generate a recording unit. 24.
  • the control unit 21 designates a correction strength table TC for increasing the contrast correction strength and sets the brightness. It may be configured to reduce eye fatigue while ensuring visibility as an image by controlling to lower.
  • the control unit 21 generates a correction intensity table designation signal for designating the second correction intensity table TC2 or the third correction intensity table so as to set the contrast correction intensity to “medium” or “strong”. Output to the recording unit 24.
  • the contrast intensity of the image displayed on the display 23 is appropriately set based on the age indicated by the age data Sage. It is corrected to.
  • specific values of the first threshold age and the second threshold age may be set in advance based on, for example, statistical or empirical numerical values.
  • the operation of the control unit 21 causes the color correction determination unit 26 to correspond to the portion of the image that is subject to color correction based on the color correction on / off signal from the control unit 21.
  • the pixel value is output to the color correction pixel value update unit 28.
  • the pixel value of the pixel of the contrast-corrected image information Scc corresponding to the portion other than the portion subjected to the color correction in the image is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as it is.
  • the recording unit 24 outputs the color correction parameters included in the color correction table TL specified by the color correction table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the color correction pixel value update unit 28.
  • the color correction pixel value update unit 28 outputs, for example, the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the contrast correction image information Scc output from the color correction determination unit 26 from the recording unit 24.
  • the pixel value corresponding to the color correction parameter is further updated, and the color is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as color corrected image information Scl corrected based on the color correction parameter.
  • the control unit 21 uses the color correction table TL used for correcting the color of the pixel of the contrast-corrected image information Scc corresponding to the portion to be corrected for the color in the image displayed on the display 23.
  • the color correction table designating signal for designating is output to the recording unit 24.
  • the color correction table TL according to the third embodiment for example, in an elderly person, the entire image looks yellowish due to macular degeneration due to aging, so that a so-called cold color is difficult to see.
  • a color correction table TL for performing color correction for increasing the so-called warm color ratio is set in advance, and color correction parameters corresponding to the color correction table TL are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner.
  • m is “1”.
  • specific color correction parameter values included in the color correction table TL include, for example, the JIS S0033 standard that defines a combination method based on the basic color region in consideration of age, or a “Senior Com color questionnaire (for example, URL It is preferable to set according to the content such as “http://www.seniorcom.co.jp/pdf/120615_survey_iro.pdf”).
  • control unit 21 generates the color correction table designation signal for designating the color correction table TL corresponding to the age or the like based on the age or the like indicated by the age data Sage. To do.
  • the control unit 21 turns off the color correction itself (that is, generates the color correction on / off signal corresponding to the off signal and outputs it to the color correction determination unit 26), and the color correction table designation signal. Does not generate.
  • the control unit 21 performs color correction according to the third embodiment in consideration of the possibility of the macular degeneration.
  • a color correction table specifying signal for specifying the color correction table TL is generated and output to the recording unit 24.
  • the control unit 21 By the operations of the control unit 21, the recording unit 24, the color correction determination unit 26, and the color correction pixel value update unit 28, the color of the image displayed on the display 23 is appropriately corrected based on the age indicated by the age data Sage. Is done.
  • the operation of the control unit 21 causes the blue light control determination unit 30 to detect the blue light control target portion of the image based on the blue light control on / off signal from the control unit 21.
  • the pixel value is output to the blue light control pixel value updating unit 31.
  • the pixel value of the color-corrected image information Scl corresponding to a portion other than the portion to be controlled by the blue light in the image is output to the display 23 as it is.
  • the recording unit 24 outputs the luminance control parameter included in the luminance table TB specified by the luminance table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the blue light control pixel value updating unit 31.
  • the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 outputs, for example, the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 from the recording unit 24.
  • the pixel value corresponding to the brightness control parameter is updated, and the corresponding blue light brightness is output to the display 23 as blue light control image information Sbc controlled based on the brightness control parameter.
  • the control unit 21 uses the luminance table used for controlling the blue light for the pixels of the color correction image information Scl corresponding to the portion to be controlled by the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23.
  • the luminance table designation signal for designating TB is output to the recording unit 24.
  • the blue light control according to the third embodiment for example, a method of reducing the pixel value (luminance value) of the blue component in the image displayed on the display 23 relative to the pixel values of the other color components.
  • the luminance of the blue light in the image is reduced by using a method for reducing the luminance of the backlight of the display 23 itself.
  • the blue light control according to the third embodiment for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23 according to the time of day (see the horizontal axis in FIG. 25).
  • the reduction rate see the vertical axis in FIG. 25 is controlled.
  • the reduction rate is lower than that at night when the user goes to bed (in other words, the brightness of the blue light is increased in the daytime compared to the nighttime).
  • the blue light is controlled using the control pattern of the reduction rate illustrated in FIG. 25, and it is generally said that the blue light acts on the time adjustment of a person. This is because the change (control) should be performed.
  • the control pattern illustrated in FIG. 25 is because blue light is more necessary during the daytime, and it is pointed out that there is a possibility that ordinary living indoors is not sufficient.
  • the luminance table TB indicating the blue light reduction rate for each time having the change illustrated in FIG.
  • a plurality of brightness control parameters that are set in advance for each age and the like and that correspond to each brightness table TB are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner.
  • the second luminance table TB2 of “reduction rate; medium” which is less than the threshold and equal to or higher than the preset second reduction rate threshold, and the “reduction rate; A three luminance table is recorded in the recording unit 24.
  • the p is “3”.
  • changes in the reduction rate for each time in the first luminance table TB1 of “reduction rate; high”, the second luminance table TB2 of “reduction rate; medium”, and the third luminance table of “reduction rate; small” are as follows: For example, a change corresponding to the change illustrated in FIG. 25 is set in advance.
  • specific brightness control parameter values included in each brightness table TB include, for example, the number of treatments by age of macular degeneration (for example, URL “http://homepage3.nifty.com/SAI-EYE-CLINIC/ It is preferable to set according to the contents such as “page / ohan / ohan.html”).
  • specific values of the first reduction rate threshold and the second reduction rate threshold may be set in advance based on, for example, statistical or empirical numerical values.
  • control unit 21 controls the blue light based on the age and the like indicated by the age data Sage and the current time indicated by the time data St, and the luminance table TB corresponding to the age and the like.
  • the brightness table designating signal for designating is generated.
  • the control unit 21 when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to the above-mentioned “child”, the control unit 21 is generally considered to be easily affected by external light or the like because the child's eyes are in the process of growth. It is said to be more sensitive than adult eyes.
  • the pupil of the eye which is supposed to become smaller with age, is larger among children, and it is said that external light is more likely to enter the eye than adult eyes.
  • the eye shows that the transmittance of the blue light is high. Therefore, in this case, the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designation signal for designating the first luminance table TB1 having the above “reduction rate;
  • the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designating signal for designating the first luminance table TB1 having the “reduction rate; large” or the second luminance table TB2 having the “reduction rate; Output.
  • the control unit 21 when the age indicated by the age data Sage is the age of the “elderly person”, if the age data Sage or the like indicates that the user is suffering from age-related macular degeneration, for example, The blue light itself is cut by the macular degeneration. Accordingly, in this case, the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designation signal for designating the third luminance table of “reduction rate; small” and outputs the luminance table designation signal to the recording unit 24. In this case, the control unit 21 generates the blue light control on / off signal for turning off the blue light control itself according to the third embodiment without outputting the luminance table designation signal, and You may output to the blue light control determination part 30.
  • the blue light control determination unit 30 the recording unit 24, and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31
  • the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23 based on the age indicated by the age data Sage is generated. Appropriately controlled.
  • the luminance of the LEDs constituting the backlight of the display 23 (brightness) can be reduced. ) May be reduced partially or entirely in the image to reduce the luminance of the blue light.
  • the control unit 21 controls the luminance of the LED along the change illustrated in FIG. 25, for example.
  • the display 23 displays either the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 or the blue light control image information Sbc output from the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 as display information Sout. And an image corresponding to the display information Sout is displayed.
  • control processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the control process shown in FIG. 26 is started, for example, from the timing when the power switch of the display device D3 is turned on, and is mainly executed mainly by the control unit 21.
  • the age data Sage is acquired through the age data acquisition unit 27 (step S15), and further through the time acquisition unit 29.
  • the time data St is acquired (step S16).
  • the time data St in step S16 is periodically executed at a predetermined time interval, for example, but the acquisition of the age data Sage in step S15 is, for example, the timing when the power switch of the display device D3 is turned on. It is preferable to execute every time.
  • step S17 when the image information Sin is input from the image generation unit 20, it is first taken into the contrast correction determination unit 22 (step S17). Then, the control unit 21 determines whether or not to execute the contrast correction according to the third embodiment, generates the contrast correction on / off signal corresponding to the determination result, and generates the control signal Sc. It outputs to the contrast correction
  • step S18 When the contrast correction according to the third embodiment is not executed in the determination in step S18 (step S18; NO), the contrast correction determination unit 22 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the color correction determination unit 26, and the control unit 21 further The process proceeds to step S21 described later.
  • the contrast correction determination unit 22 outputs the image information Sin to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 and the control unit. 21 generates the intensity correction table designation signal in accordance with the above-described standard, and outputs it as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24, thereby designating the intensity correction table TC required at that time (step S19).
  • the intensity correction table TC indicated by the intensity correction table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the intensity of contrast correction is designated), and the selected intensity is selected.
  • the intensity correction parameter included in the correction table TC is output to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25.
  • the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 uses the intensity correction parameter output from the recording unit 24 to calculate the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the contrast correction determination unit 22. Is updated to the pixel value indicated by (step S20), and is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as the contrast-corrected image information Scc.
  • control unit 21 determines whether or not to perform color correction according to the third embodiment in accordance with the above-described criteria, generates the color correction on / off signal corresponding to the determination result, and generates the control signal Sc. Is output to the color correction determination unit 26 (step S21).
  • the color correction determination unit 26 uses the contrast correction image information Scc output from the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25. The data is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as it is, and the control unit 21 proceeds to step S24 described later.
  • step S21 when color correction according to the third embodiment is executed in the determination in step S21 (step S21; YES), the color correction determination unit 26 outputs the contrast correction image information Scc to the color correction pixel value update unit 28, and The control unit 21 generates the color correction table designation signal in accordance with the above-described criteria, and outputs it as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24, thereby designating the color correction table TL required at that time (step S22). ).
  • the color correction table TL indicated by the color correction table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the color correction mode is designated), and the selected color correction is performed.
  • the color correction parameters included in the table TL are output to the color correction pixel value update unit 28.
  • the color correction pixel value update unit 28 outputs the pixel values of the respective color components in the pixels included in the contrast correction image information Scc output from the color correction determination unit 26 to the color output from the recording unit 24.
  • the pixel value indicated by the correction parameter is updated (step S23), and is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as the color correction image information Scl.
  • the control unit 21 determines whether or not to execute the blue light control according to the third embodiment in accordance with the above-described criterion, and generates and controls the blue light control on / off signal corresponding to the determination result.
  • the signal Sc is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 (step S24).
  • the blue light control determination unit 30 outputs the color correction image information output from the color correction pixel value update unit 28. Scl is output as it is to the display 23 as display information Sout (step S27).
  • step S24 when the blue light control according to the third embodiment is executed in the determination in step S24 (step S24; YES), the blue light control determination unit 30 outputs the color correction image information Scl to the blue light control pixel value update unit 31.
  • the control unit 21 generates the luminance table designation signal in accordance with the above-described standard, and outputs it to the recording unit 24 as the control signal Sc, thereby designating the luminance table TB required at that time (step). S25).
  • the luminance table TB indicated by the luminance table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the blue light reduction rate is designated), and the selected luminance table TB is selected.
  • the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 is output to the blue light control pixel value update unit 31.
  • the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 outputs the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 from the recording unit 24.
  • the pixel value indicated by the brightness control parameter is updated (step S26), and is output as display information Sout to the display 23 as the blue light control image information Sbc.
  • the display 23 receives either the color correction image information Scl or the blue light control image information Sbc as display information Sout, and displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout (step S27). Thereafter, the control unit 21 ends the control process according to the third embodiment.
  • the luminance of the blue light in the image information Sin is reduced based on the age data Sage, and is equivalent to the image information Sin based on the age data Sage. Display the image to be played. Therefore, the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image and while protecting the user's eyes.
  • any one of blue light control, contrast correction, and color correction is executed on the image information Sin to display an image.
  • the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image and while effectively protecting the user's eyes.
  • the luminance reduction rate of the blue light is increased and the contrast correction intensity is set to “weak”. Therefore, the eyes of a child or an adult can be protected and an image can be displayed in a contrast state that is easy to see.
  • the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to “adult”
  • the luminance reduction rate of the blue light is increased
  • the contrast correction strength is increased
  • the brightness (brightness) of the display 23 is increased. If the control is performed to lower the image, it is possible to display an image while reducing eye fatigue while ensuring the visibility as an image.
  • the luminance reduction rate of blue light is Since the contrast correction strength is set to “medium” or “strong” and the image is displayed with the color corrected based on the age, the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state for the elderly.
  • the control of the blue light is executed based on the age data Sage and the time data St (see FIG. 25)
  • another control process is executed based on the age data Sage and the time data St.
  • the image can be displayed in a state that is easy to see according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image, protects the user's eyes, and matches the internal rhythm through the visual sense.
  • the display image information is generated so that the luminance of the blue light during the activity time (for example, daytime) of the user viewing the image is relatively higher than the luminance during the time other than the activity time ( In the case of FIG. 25), the image can be displayed in accordance with the activity time of the user who visually recognizes the image and the internal rhythm at other times.
  • the blue light control according to the third embodiment it is preferable to execute the blue light control according to the third embodiment by changing the change shown in FIG. 25 upside down in FIG. is there.
  • new age data Sage when new age data Sage is acquired, if a process is executed again to display an image based on the new age data Sage, including any control of blue light, a new one is displayed.
  • the image can be appropriately displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image, while protecting the user's eyes.
  • the transmittance of blue light is increased when the cataract is treated. Therefore, even for a user of an age corresponding to “elderly”, it is preferable to execute the blue light control with the reduction rate being “large” or “medium”.
  • each of the intensity correction table TC, the color correction table TL, and the luminance table TB are not determined by the user's age as in the third embodiment. If the configuration corresponding to each of the parameters is input, the control processing according to the third embodiment can be executed according to the preference of the user who visually recognizes the image, and the display mode of the image is adjusted according to the user. be able to.
  • the third embodiment described above can have various aspects.
  • contrast correction for the image information Sin (by the contrast correction determination unit 22 and the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25) ⁇ color correction (the color correction determination unit 26 and the color correction pixel value update unit 28). )) ⁇ blue light control (by the blue light control determination unit 30 and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31).
  • the order of contrast correction, color correction, and blue light control may be changed in any way, or contrast correction, color correction, and blue light control may be performed on the image information Sin. It is also possible to execute the processing simultaneously in parallel, and superimpose the execution results at the end to output them as display information Sout to the display 23.
  • the blue light control according to the third embodiment can be configured not to be performed on a daily basis (see FIG. 25) but on a monthly or seasonal basis.
  • a monthly or seasonal luminance table is recorded in the recording unit 24 and used.
  • the blue light may be controlled uniformly, for example, at a preset reduction rate without using the time data St.
  • control processing according to the third embodiment can be similarly applied to, for example, the HLS color space, HSV color space, or YCbCr color space including luminance (Y). is there.
  • the programs corresponding to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 10, 22 and 26 are recorded on a recording medium such as an optical disk, or acquired and recorded via a network such as the Internet,
  • a general-purpose microcomputer or the like the microcomputer or the like is executed by the control unit 2 or the control unit 21, the switching control unit 3, the contrast correction determination unit 22, and the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 according to each embodiment.
  • Color correction determination unit 26, age data acquisition unit 27, color correction pixel value update unit 28, blue light control determination unit 30, blue light control pixel value update unit 31, pixel value update unit 6, and switching unit 7. Is also possible.
  • the present invention can be used in the field of display devices, and is particularly remarkable when applied to the field of display device control for the purpose of maintaining / adjusting a user's internal rhythm. An effect is obtained.

Abstract

An image processing device is provided which can optimally maintain / adjust body rhythms via the sense of sight of a person watching a display that generates blue light. This image processing device is provided with a switching control unit 3 which acquires image information Sin corresponding to an image to be displayed on a display 4, a time acquisition unit 10 which acquires time information indicating the time of day, the day, the month or the season, and a control unit 2 which, on the basis of the acquired time information, controls the brightness corresponding to any of the color components in the image information Sin.

Description

画像処理装置、表示装置並びに画像処理方法及び画像処理用プログラムImage processing apparatus, display apparatus, image processing method, and image processing program
 本発明は、画像処理装置、表示装置並びに画像処理方法及び画像処理用プログラムの技術分野に属する。より詳細には、表示される画像を視るユーザの眼を保護するための画像処理装置、表示装置並びに画像処理方法、及び当該画像処理装置用のプログラムの技術分野に属する。 The present invention belongs to the technical field of an image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and an image processing program. More specifically, the present invention belongs to a technical field of an image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and a program for the image processing device for protecting the eyes of a user who views a displayed image.
 近年、パーソナルコンピュータやタブレット型端末装置のディスプレイでは、そのバックライトとしてLED(Light Emitting Diode)が積極的に採用されている。このLEDは可視光線における青色領域の光を強く発しており、それらはエネルギーが強いため、ユーザの眼の網膜等の損傷の原因になると言われている。この問題を改善するために、疲労感の低減及び眼病予防に効果的な光学部品が提案されている。このような防眩効果を有し、疲労感の低減、眼病予防にも効果的で、且つ視認性が良好な光学部品を開示する特許文献として、下記特許文献1が挙げられる。 In recent years, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) have been actively adopted as backlights in the displays of personal computers and tablet terminals. This LED emits strong light in the blue region of visible light, and since it has high energy, it is said to cause damage to the retina and the like of the user's eyes. In order to improve this problem, optical parts effective for reducing fatigue and preventing eye diseases have been proposed. Patent Document 1 listed below is an example of a patent document that discloses such an optical component that has such an antiglare effect, is effective in reducing fatigue and preventing eye diseases, and has good visibility.
 この特許文献1に開示されている光学部品では、特定波長の光(以下、単に「ブルーライト」と称し、その波長は400ナノメートル~500ナノメートル程度である)を低減させることで、防眩効果、疲労感低減及び眼病予防を実現している。また当該光学部品では、それを表示装置に取り付ける(若しくは、レンズ型にした当該光学部品を眼鏡に取り付けて、そのレンズを通して視る)ことで、眼に照射されるブルーライトを低減する構成とされている。 In the optical component disclosed in Patent Document 1, light of a specific wavelength (hereinafter, simply referred to as “blue light”, the wavelength is about 400 to 500 nanometers) is reduced, thereby preventing glare. The effect, reduction of fatigue, and prevention of eye diseases are realized. In addition, the optical component is configured to reduce blue light irradiated to the eye by attaching it to a display device (or attaching the optical component in a lens shape to spectacles and viewing through the lens). ing.
 一方で上記ブルーライトは、下記非特許文献1及び非特許文献2等に開示されているように、上記LEDをバックライトとする液晶ディスプレイを視認する者の体内リズムに影響するとの研究成果も報告されている。よってこの場合にブルーライトは、常に低減させるのではなく、例えば時間帯に応じて適宜そのオン/オフや、低減する場合の低減率を切り換えられるべきであると考えられる。 On the other hand, as disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2 below, research results have been reported that the blue light affects the internal rhythm of a person viewing a liquid crystal display using the LED as a backlight. Has been. Therefore, in this case, the blue light is not always reduced, but it is considered that the on / off of the blue light should be appropriately switched according to the time zone, and the reduction rate in the case of reduction should be switched.
特開2013-8052号公報JP 2013-8052 A
 しかしながら、上記特許文献1に開示されている光学部品を用いた場合、状況に応じて頻繁にそれを取り替えることは難しいため、上記のブルーライトの低減を適宜オン/オフ制御したり、或いは低減率を可変としたりすることはできない。また、光学部品自体における低減率に関しても、その材料によって固定されるため、ユーザによって要求される低減率に応じて任意にそれを変化させることは不可能であるという問題点があった。そしてこれらの場合、上記非特許文献1及び非特許文献2に開示されている研究成果を応用して体内リズムを調整することは不可能であるという問題点があった。 However, when the optical component disclosed in Patent Document 1 is used, it is difficult to replace it frequently depending on the situation. Therefore, the above blue light reduction can be appropriately controlled on / off, or the reduction rate. Cannot be made variable. Also, the reduction rate in the optical component itself is fixed by the material, and therefore, there is a problem that it is impossible to arbitrarily change it according to the reduction rate required by the user. In these cases, there is a problem that it is impossible to adjust the internal rhythm by applying the research results disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2.
 そこで本発明は、上記の各問題点に鑑みて為されたもので、その課題の一例は、ブルーライトを発生させるディスプレイを視認する者の、視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持/調整することが可能な画像処理装置、表示装置並びに画像処理方法、及び当該画像処理装置用のプログラムを提供することにある。 Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and one example of the problem is to maintain and adjust the internal rhythm and the like through vision of a person viewing a display that generates blue light. An image processing device, a display device, an image processing method, and a program for the image processing device are provided.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項1に記載の発明は、ディスプレイ等の表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する切換制御部等の画像情報取得手段と、時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時刻取得部等の時情報取得手段と、前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる画素値更新部等の処理手段と、を備える。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention described in claim 1 is characterized in that an image information acquisition unit such as a switching control unit that acquires image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on a display unit such as a display, time, date A time information acquisition means such as a time acquisition unit for acquiring time information indicating either the month or the season, and a luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information Processing means such as a pixel value update unit that controls to generate display image information and output and display the information on the display means.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項15に記載の発明は、請求項1から請求項14のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置と、前記表示用画像情報を取得して、当該表示用画像情報に相当する画像を表示する前記表示手段と、を備える。 In order to solve the above-described problem, an invention according to claim 15 acquires the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 14 and the display image information, and performs the display. And the display means for displaying an image corresponding to the image information for use.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項16に記載の発明は、ディスプレイ等の表示手段に接続される画像処理装置において実行される画像処理方法において、前記表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する画像情報取得工程と、時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時情報取得工程と、前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる処理工程と、を含む。 In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 16 corresponds to an image to be displayed on the display means in an image processing method executed in an image processing apparatus connected to display means such as a display. An image information acquisition step for acquiring image information, a time information acquisition step for acquiring time information indicating any of time, day, month, or season, and a luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information. And a processing step of generating display image information by controlling based on the acquired time information and outputting and displaying it on the display means.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項17に記載の発明は、ディスプレイ等の表示手段に接続される画像処理装置に含まれるコンピュータを、前記表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する画像情報取得手段、時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時情報取得手段、及び、前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる処理手段、として機能させる。 In order to solve the above-described problems, the invention described in claim 17 is directed to a computer included in an image processing apparatus connected to a display unit such as a display, and displays image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display unit. The image information acquisition means to acquire, the time information acquisition means to acquire time information indicating any of time, day, month or season, and the luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information Then, control is performed based on the information, display image information is generated, and it is made to function as processing means for outputting and displaying on the display means.
 請求項1又は請求項15乃至請求項17のいずれか一項に記載の発明によれば、画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成するので、表示用画像情報に相当する画像を視認する者の、視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 1 or claims 15 to 17, the luminance corresponding to any one of the color components in the image information is controlled based on the time information to display the display image information. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily maintain / adjust the internal rhythm and the like of the person who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display image information.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項2に記載の発明は、請求項1に記載の画像処理装置において、前記取得した時情報に基づいて前記処理手段は、前記取得した画像情報における青色成分に相当する前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 2 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the processing means based on the acquired time information, the blue component in the acquired image information The display image information is generated by controlling the luminance corresponding to.
 請求項2に記載の発明によれば、請求項1に記載の発明の作用に加えて、取得した画像情報における青色成分に相当する輝度を時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成するので、画像を視認する者の体内リズム等に影響を与え易いとされる青色成分に相当する輝度を適切に制御して、当該体内リズム等を良好に維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 2, in addition to the operation of the invention described in claim 1, the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the acquired image information based on the time information. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain / adjust the in-vivo rhythm and the like by appropriately controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component that is likely to affect the in-vivo rhythm and the like of the person viewing the image.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項3に記載の発明は、請求項2に記載の画像処理装置において、前記取得した時情報に基づいて前記処理手段は、前記青色成分に相当する前記輝度につき、前記表示用画像情報に相当して前記表示手段に表示される前記画像を視認する者の活動時間における当該輝度が、当該活動時間以外の時間における当該輝度に対して相対的に高くなるように制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 3 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the processing means, based on the acquired time information, has the luminance corresponding to the blue component. Therefore, the luminance in the activity time of the person viewing the image displayed on the display means corresponding to the display image information is relatively higher than the luminance in the time other than the activity time. To display the image information for display.
 請求項3に記載の発明によれば、請求項2に記載の発明の作用に加えて、画像を視認する者の活動時間における青色成分に相当する輝度が、それ以外の時間における当該輝度よりも高くなるように制御されるので、活動時間とそれ以外の時間における体内リズムを良好に維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 3, in addition to the operation of the invention described in claim 2, the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the activity time of the person viewing the image is higher than the luminance at other times. Since it is controlled to be high, the internal rhythm during the active time and other times can be maintained / adjusted satisfactorily.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項4に記載の発明は、請求項1から請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報により示される日の出の時刻又は日の入りの時刻の少なくともいずれか一方に基づき、前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-described problem, the invention according to claim 4 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the processing means is indicated by the acquired time information. The display image information is generated by controlling the luminance based on at least one of the sunrise time and sunset time.
 請求項4に記載の発明によれば、請求項1から請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の発明の作用に加えて、日の出の時刻又は日の入りの時刻の少なくともいずれか一方に基づいて色成分の輝度を制御して表示用画像情報を生成するので、画像を視認する者の一日の体内リズム等の変化に合わせた色成分の画像を表示させることで、より良好に当該体内リズム等を維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 4, in addition to the operation of the invention described in any one of claims 1 to 3, a color component based on at least one of sunrise time or sunset time. The display image information is generated by controlling the brightness of the image, so by displaying the image of the color component in accordance with the change in the daily rhythm of the person viewing the image, the internal rhythm and the like can be better displayed. Can be maintained / adjusted.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項5に記載の発明は、請求項1から請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、前記処理手段における前記輝度の制御態様を指定するために用いられる入力部等の指定手段を更に備え、前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報と、前記指定された制御態様と、に基づいて前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 5 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the control mode of the luminance in the processing means is specified. And a processing unit for generating the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and the specified control mode. Configured to do.
 請求項5に記載の発明によれば、請求項1から請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の発明の作用に加えて、指定手段により指定された輝度の制御態様と、時情報と、に基づいて色成分の輝度を制御して表示用画像情報を生成するので、画像を視認する者の好み等に合わせて輝度を制御でき、当該者に適合させてその体内リズム等を維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 5, in addition to the operation of the invention described in any one of claims 1 to 4, the brightness control mode specified by the specifying means and the time information Since the display image information is generated by controlling the luminance of the color component based on the luminance, the luminance can be controlled according to the preference of the person viewing the image, and the body rhythm is maintained / adjusted according to the person concerned. be able to.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項6に記載の発明は、請求項5に記載の画像処理装置において、前記制御態様を指定する場合において前記表示手段は、制御対象たる前記輝度の時間変化に相当するグラフを表示し、前記制御態様を指定する場合において前記指定手段は、前記表示されているグラフの一部又は全部の形状を変更して前記制御態様を指定するために用いられ、前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報と、前記グラフを用いて指定された制御態様と、に基づいて前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 6 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 5, wherein, when the control mode is designated, the display means changes the time change of the luminance to be controlled. In the case of designating the control mode, the designating means is used for designating the control mode by changing the shape of part or all of the displayed graph. The processing means is configured to generate the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and a control mode designated using the graph.
 請求項6に記載の発明によれば、請求項5に記載の発明の作用に加えて、輝度の制御態様を指定する場合において当該輝度の時間変化に相当するグラフを表示し、そのグラフの一部又は全部の形状の変更により制御態様が指定されるので、画像を視認する者の好み等に合わせて簡易に輝度を制御でき、当該者により適合させてその体内リズム等を維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 6, in addition to the operation of the invention described in claim 5, when the luminance control mode is designated, a graph corresponding to the time change of the luminance is displayed. Since the control mode is specified by changing the shape of the part or the whole, the brightness can be easily controlled according to the preference of the person viewing the image, etc., and the body rhythm etc. can be maintained / adjusted according to the person concerned Can do.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項7に記載の発明は、請求項1から請求項6のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、前記表示手段の位置を示す位置情報を取得する位置取得部等の位置情報取得手段を更に備え、前記時情報取得手段は、前記取得された位置情報により示される前記位置に対応した前記時情報を取得するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, according to a seventh aspect of the present invention, in the image processing apparatus according to any one of the first to sixth aspects, position information indicating the position of the display means is acquired. Position information acquisition means such as a position acquisition unit is further provided, and the time information acquisition means is configured to acquire the time information corresponding to the position indicated by the acquired position information.
 請求項7に記載の発明によれば、請求項1から請求項6のいずれか一項に記載の発明の作用に加えて、位置情報により示される表示手段の位置に対応した時情報を取得して色成分の輝度の制御に用いるので、当該位置に適合させてより適切に体内リズム等を維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 7, in addition to the operation of the invention described in any one of claims 1 to 6, time information corresponding to the position of the display means indicated by the position information is acquired. Therefore, the internal rhythm and the like can be maintained / adjusted more appropriately according to the position.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項8に記載の発明は、請求項1に記載の画像処理装置において、前記表示された画像を視る者の年齢に対応した年齢対応情報を取得する年齢データ取得部等の年齢対応情報取得手段を更に備え、前記処理手段は、前記画像における青色成分に相当する輝度を前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて低減しつつ、当該年齢対応情報に基づいて当該画像情報から表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させるように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 8 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the age-related information corresponding to the age of the person viewing the displayed image is acquired. Further comprising age-corresponding information acquisition means such as a data acquisition unit, wherein the processing means reduces the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image based on the acquired age-corresponding information, and based on the age-corresponding information Display image information is generated from the image information and output to the display means for display.
 請求項8に記載の発明によれば、請求項1に記載の発明の作用に加えて、画像における青色成分に相当する輝度を年齢対応情報に基づいて低減しつつ、当該年齢対応情報に基づいて画像情報から表示用画像情報を生成する。よって、表示用画像情報に相当する画像を視認する者の年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該者の眼を保護しつつ、画像を表示させることができる。 According to the invention described in claim 8, in addition to the operation of the invention described in claim 1, the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image is reduced based on the age-corresponding information, and based on the age-corresponding information. Display image information is generated from the image information. Therefore, it is possible to display an image in an easy-to-see state according to the age of the person who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display image information and protecting the eyes of the person.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項9に記載の発明は、請求項8に記載の画像処理装置において、前記処理手段は、(i)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記輝度を低減する低減処理、(ii)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記画像におけるコントラストを補正するコントラスト補正処理、及び、(iii)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記画像における色を補正する色補正処理、のうち、前記低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を、前記取得した画像情報に対して実行して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 9 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the processing means (i) reduces the luminance based on the acquired age correspondence information. (Ii) contrast correction processing for correcting contrast in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information, and (iii) color correction for correcting color in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information. Among the processes, any one of the processes including the reduction process is performed on the acquired image information to generate the display image information.
 請求項9に記載の発明によれば、請求項8に記載の発明の作用に加えて、生成手段が、低減処理、コントラスト補正処理、及び色補正処理、のうち、低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を画像情報に対して実行して表示用画像情報を生成する。よって、多面的な処理により、画像を視認する者の年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該者の眼を効果的に保護しつつ、画像を表示させることができる。 According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, in addition to the action of the eighth aspect, the generation means includes any one of the reduction process, the contrast correction process, and the color correction process including the reduction process. Processing is performed on the image information to generate display image information. Therefore, the image can be displayed by multifaceted processing while being easy to see according to the age of the person viewing the image and effectively protecting the eyes of the person.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項10に記載の発明は、請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、前記取得した年齢対応情報に対応する前記年齢が、子供又は成人を示すものとして予め設定された年齢閾値以下の年齢である場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が前記年齢閾値に対応して予め設定された低減閾値以上である前記低減処理、及び、前記コントラストの補正が前記年齢閾値に対応して予め設定された補正閾値以下である前記コントラスト補正処理、を実行するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 10 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the age corresponding to the acquired age correspondence information indicates in advance a child or an adult. When the age is equal to or lower than a set age threshold, the processing means performs the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or higher than a reduction threshold set in advance corresponding to the age threshold, and the contrast correction is performed. The contrast correction process that is equal to or lower than a correction threshold set in advance corresponding to the age threshold is executed.
 請求項10に記載の発明によれば、請求項9に記載の発明の作用に加えて、年齢対応情報に対応する年齢が年齢閾値以下の年齢である場合に、輝度の低減が低減閾値以上である低減処理、及び、コントラストの補正が補正閾値以下であるコントラスト補正処理、を実行する。よって、子供又は成人の眼を保護すると共に、見易いコントラストの状態で画像を表示することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 10, in addition to the operation of the invention described in claim 9, when the age corresponding to the age correspondence information is an age equal to or lower than the age threshold, the reduction in luminance is equal to or more than the reduction threshold. A certain reduction process and a contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or less than the correction threshold are executed. Therefore, it is possible to protect an eye of a child or an adult and display an image with a contrast that is easy to see.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項11に記載の発明は、請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、前記取得した年齢対応情報に対応する前記年齢が、成人を示すものとして予め設定された年齢幅閾値内の年齢である場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が前記年齢幅閾値に対応して予め設定された低減閾値以上である前記低減処理、前記コントラストの補正が前記年齢幅閾値に対応して予め設定された補正閾値以上である前記コントラスト補正処理、及び、前記年齢幅閾値に対応して前記画像全体の輝度を下げる輝度補正処理、を実行するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 11 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the age corresponding to the acquired age-corresponding information is preset to indicate an adult. When the age is within the age range threshold, the processing means performs the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or greater than a preset reduction threshold corresponding to the age range threshold, and the contrast correction is the age. The contrast correction process that is greater than or equal to a preset correction threshold value corresponding to the width threshold value and the luminance correction process that reduces the luminance of the entire image corresponding to the age width threshold value are configured to be executed.
 請求項11に記載の発明によれば、請求項9に記載の発明の作用に加えて、年齢対応情報に対応する年齢が年齢幅閾値内の年齢である場合に、輝度の低減が低減閾値以上である低減処理、コントラストの補正が補正閾値以上であるコントラスト補正処理、及び、年齢幅閾値に対応した画像全体の輝度を下げる輝度補正処理、を実行する。よって、成人の眼を保護すると共に、見易いコントラスト及び画像輝度の状態で画像を表示することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 11, in addition to the action of the invention described in claim 9, when the age corresponding to the age-corresponding information is an age within the age range threshold, the luminance reduction is equal to or greater than the reduction threshold. Reduction processing, contrast correction processing in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than the correction threshold value, and luminance correction processing for reducing the luminance of the entire image corresponding to the age width threshold value. Therefore, it is possible to protect an adult's eyes and to display an image with easy-to-see contrast and image brightness.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項12に記載の発明は、請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、前記者が、高齢者を示すものとして予め設定された年齢閾値以上の年齢の者であり、且つ当該者が予め設定された眼の病気に罹っていることが、前記取得した年齢対応情報により示されている場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が予め設定された低減閾値以下である前記低減処理、前記コントラストの補正が予め設定された補正閾値以上である前記コントラスト補正処理、及び、前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記色を補正する前記色補正処理、を実行するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 12 is the image processing apparatus according to claim 9, wherein the person is an older person than an age threshold set in advance as indicating an elderly person. And when the acquired age-corresponding information indicates that the person suffers from a preset eye disease, the processing means reduces the brightness by a preset reduction. The reduction process that is equal to or less than a threshold value, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than a preset correction threshold value, and the color correction process that corrects the color based on the acquired age-corresponding information. Configured to do.
 請求項12に記載の発明によれば、請求項9に記載の発明の作用に加えて、画像を視る者が既定の年齢閾値以上の高齢者であり、且つ当該者が既定の眼の病気に罹っていることが示されている場合に、輝度の低減が低減閾値以下である低減処理、コントラストの補正が補正閾値以上であるコントラスト補正処理、及び、年齢対応情報に基づいて色を補正する色補正処理、を実行する。よって、高齢者において見易い状態で画像を表示することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 12, in addition to the action of the invention described in claim 9, the person viewing the image is an elderly person having a predetermined age threshold or more, and the person is a predetermined eye disease. In the case where it is shown that the subject has suffered from the above, the color is corrected based on the reduction process in which the luminance reduction is equal to or less than the reduction threshold, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is equal to or greater than the correction threshold, and the age correspondence information Execute color correction processing. Therefore, an image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state for the elderly.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項13に記載の発明は、請求項8から請求項12のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、前記年齢対応情報取得手段により新たな前記年齢対応情報が取得されたとき、前記処理手段は当該新たな年齢対応情報に基づいて、前記低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を、前記取得した画像情報に対して実行して前記表示用画像情報を生成するように構成される。 In order to solve the above-described problem, the invention according to claim 13 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 8 to 12, wherein the age-corresponding information acquisition unit newly adds the age-corresponding information. When the information is acquired, the processing unit generates any of the display image information by executing any one of the processes including the reduction process on the acquired image information based on the new age-corresponding information. Configured to do.
 請求項13に記載の発明によれば、請求項8から請求項12のいずれか一項に記載の発明の作用に加えて、新たな年齢対応情報に基づいて、低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を実行して表示用画像情報を生成するので、新たな年齢対応情報が取得できた場合にも、画像を視認する者の年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該者の眼を保護しつつ、適切に画像を表示させることができる。 According to the invention described in claim 13, in addition to the action of the invention described in any one of claims 8 to 12, any process including a reduction process based on new age correspondence information Is executed to generate display image information, so that even when new age-corresponding information can be acquired, it is easy to see according to the age of the person viewing the image and while protecting the eyes of the person, An image can be displayed appropriately.
 上記の課題を解決するために、請求項14に記載の発明は、請求項1から請求項13のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、前記色成分が、RGB(Red Green Blue)色空間におけるいずれかの色成分、又は、色相及び彩度を含む三つの要素からなる色空間における前記色相内のいずれかの色成分、のいずれかであるように構成される。 In order to solve the above-described problem, an invention according to claim 14 is the image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the color component is RGB (Red Green Blue) color. Any one of the color components in the space, or any one of the color components in the hue in the color space composed of three elements including the hue and the saturation.
 請求項14に記載の発明によれば、請求項1から請求項13のいずれか一項に記載の発明の作用に加えて、色成分が、RGB色空間におけるいずれかの色成分、又は、色相及び彩度を含む三つの要素からなる色空間における色相内のいずれかの色成分、のいずれかであるので、汎用されている色空間の色成分について、表示用画像情報に相当する画像を視認する者の、視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持/調整することができる。 According to the invention described in claim 14, in addition to the operation of the invention described in any one of claims 1 to 13, the color component is any color component or hue in the RGB color space. And any one of the color components in the hue in the color space composed of three elements including the saturation, so that the image corresponding to the display image information is visually recognized for the color components of the widely used color space. It is possible to maintain / adjust the rhythm etc. of the body through vision.
 本発明によれば、画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成して表示させる。 According to the present invention, the luminance corresponding to any color component in the image information is controlled based on the time information to generate and display the display image information.
 従って、表示用画像情報に相当する画像を視認する者の、視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持/調整することができる。 Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily maintain / adjust the internal rhythm of the person who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display image information.
第1実施形態の原理に係る暦情報の一例示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the calendar information based on the principle of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(I)である。It is figure (I) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(II)である。It is figure (II) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(III)である。It is figure (III) which illustrates the control mode in one day of the blue light based on the principle of a 1st embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(IV)である。It is a figure (IV) which illustrates the control aspect in the day of the blue light based on the principle of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(V)である。It is figure (V) which illustrates the control aspect in one day of the blue light based on the principle of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様を例示する図(VI)である。It is figure (VI) which illustrates the control aspect in the day of the blue light based on the principle of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図である。1 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a display device according to a first embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理を示す図であり、(a)は各色の輝度に応じたブルーライトの強度の低減処理を例示する図であり、(b)は実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の増強処理を例示する図である。It is a figure which shows the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is a figure which illustrates the reduction process of the intensity | strength of the blue light according to the brightness | luminance of each color, (b) is the intensity | strength of the blue light which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the enhancement process. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理の具体例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the specific example of the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理における設定画面等を例示する図であり、(a)は当該設定画面を例示する図であり、(b)は当該設定の第1例を示す図であり、(c)は当該設定の第2例を示す図である。It is a figure which illustrates a setting screen etc. in control processing concerning a 1st embodiment, (a) is a figure which illustrates the setting screen, (b) is a figure showing the 1st example of the setting, c) is a diagram showing a second example of the setting. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理における設定を例示する図(I)であり、(a)は当該設定の第3例を示す図であり、(b)は当該設定の第4例を示す図である。It is a figure (I) which illustrates setting in control processing concerning a 1st embodiment, (a) is a figure showing the 3rd example of the setting, and (b) is a figure showing the 4th example of the setting. is there. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理における設定を例示する図(II)であり、(a)は当該設定の第5例を示す図であり、(b)は当該設定の第6例を示す図である。It is figure (II) which illustrates the setting in the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the 5th example of the said setting, (b) is a figure which shows the 6th example of the said setting. is there. 第1実施形態に係る制御処理の他の具体例を示す図であり、(a)は他の第1例を示す図であり、(b)は他の第2例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the other specific example of the control processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows another 1st example, (b) is a figure which shows another 2nd example. 第2実施形態の原理を説明する図(I)であり、(a)はHLS色空間の概念を示す図であり、(b)はHSV色空間の概念を示す図である。It is a figure (I) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the concept of HLS color space, (b) is a figure which shows the concept of HSV color space. 第2実施形態の原理を説明する図(II)であり、(a)はHLS色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の低減処理(I)を説明する図であり、(b)はHLS色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の低減処理(II)を説明する図である。It is a figure (II) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a figure explaining the reduction process (I) of the intensity | strength of the blue light in HLS color space, (b) is the blue in HLS color space. It is a figure explaining light intensity reduction processing (II). 第2実施形態の原理を説明する図(III)であり、(a)はHSV色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の低減処理(I)を説明する図であり、(b)はHSV色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の低減処理(II)を説明する図である。It is a figure (III) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a figure explaining the intensity | strength reduction process (I) of the blue light in HSV color space, (b) is blue in HSV color space. It is a figure explaining light intensity reduction processing (II). 第2実施形態の原理を説明する図(III)であり、(a)はHLS色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の増強処理(I)を説明する図であり、(b)はHLS色空間におけるブルーライトの増強処理(II)を説明する図である。It is a figure (III) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a figure explaining the increase process (I) of the intensity | strength of the blue light in HLS color space, (b) is the blue in HLS color space. It is a figure explaining the light reinforcement | strengthening process (II). 第2実施形態の原理を説明する図(IV)であり、(a)はHSV色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の増強処理(I)を説明する図であり、(b)はHSV色空間におけるブルーライトの強度の低減処理(II)を説明する図である。It is a figure (IV) explaining the principle of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a figure explaining the increase process (I) of the intensity | strength of the blue light in HSV color space, (b) is the blue in HSV color space. It is a figure explaining light intensity reduction processing (II). 第2実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the display apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態に係る制御処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the control processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 第3実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the display apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 第3実施形態に係るコントラストの補正処理を示す図であり、(a)は当該補正処理を実行しない場合を示す図であり、(b)は当該補正処理を実行する場合の第一例を示す図であり、(c)は当該補正処理を実行する場合の第二例を示す図であり、(d)は当該補正処理を実行する場合の第三例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the correction process of the contrast which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the case where the said correction process is not performed, (b) shows the 1st example in the case of performing the said correction process. (C) is a figure which shows the 2nd example in the case of performing the said correction process, (d) is a figure which shows the 3rd example in the case of performing the said correction process. 第3実施形態に係るバックライトの輝度の時刻に対応した制御処理を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the control processing corresponding to the time of the brightness | luminance of the backlight which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 第3実施形態に係る制御処理を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the control processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.
 次に、本発明に係る各実施形態について説明する。 Next, each embodiment according to the present invention will be described.
 (I)第1実施形態
 初めに、本発明に係る第1実施形態について、図1乃至図15を用いて説明する。なお以下に説明する第1実施形態は、動画及び静止画を含む画像を表示する表示装置におけるブルーライトの強度の制御処理に対して、本発明を適用した場合の実施の形態である。
(I) First Embodiment First, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The first embodiment described below is an embodiment when the present invention is applied to the control process of the intensity of blue light in a display device that displays images including moving images and still images.
 (A)第1実施形態の原理
 先ず、第1実施形態について具体的に説明する前に、第1実施形態の原理について図1乃至図7を用いて説明する。なお、図1は第1実施形態の原理に係る暦情報の一例示す図であり、図2乃至図7は第1実施形態の原理に係るブルーライトの一日における制御態様をそれぞれ例示する図である。
(A) Principle of First Embodiment First, before specifically describing the first embodiment, the principle of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of calendar information according to the principle of the first embodiment, and FIGS. 2 to 7 are diagrams illustrating examples of a blue light day control mode according to the principle of the first embodiment. is there.
 後ほど詳述するように、第1実施形態においてでは、上記ブルーライトを有害であり常に低減すべきものであるとは考えず、人が視認するディスプレイから発せられるブルーライトを、当該人の、日、月又は季節等の時間における体内リズム(生活リズム)等の変化に合わせるように、当該時間に基づいて制御する。このとき一般には、人が起きて活動している時間帯のブルーライトの強度が、当該人が就寝し又は休息している時間帯のブルーライトの強度より高くなるように、上記時間に応じて当該強度を制御する。これにより、上記のように強度が制御されるブルーライトを発するディスプレイに表示される画像等を視認する人の、その視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持又は調整する。 As will be described in detail later, in the first embodiment, the blue light is not harmful and should not always be reduced, and the blue light emitted from the display visually recognized by the person is displayed on the person's day, Control is performed based on the time so as to match changes in the internal rhythm (life rhythm) or the like in the time of the month or season. In general, the intensity of the blue light during the time when the person is awake and active is higher than the intensity of the blue light during the time when the person is sleeping or resting according to the above time. Control the intensity. Thereby, the internal rhythm etc. through the visual sense of the person who visually recognizes the image displayed on the display emitting blue light whose intensity is controlled as described above are favorably maintained or adjusted.
 ここで第1実施形態では、上記ブルーライトの強度の制御の基準となる上記時間として、例えば図1に例示する暦情報を用いる。図1に例示する暦情報は、例えば国立天文台において公開されているものであり、地理的な位置(図1に例示する場合は東京)ごと且つその年の月ごとに、日の出の時刻、南中時刻及び日の入りの時刻のそれぞれを、参照可能に含んでいる。これにより本発明では、当該暦情報に含まれている各時刻に対応させて、ブルーライトの強度の強弱を例えば日ごとに制御する。より具体的に本発明では、上記暦情報に基づき、人が起きて活発に活動していると推定される時間帯ほどブルーライトの強度が高くなるように制御する。換言すれば、人が就寝又は休息していると推定される時間帯ほどブルーライトの強度が低くなるように制御する。 Here, in the first embodiment, for example, calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1 is used as the time serving as a reference for controlling the intensity of the blue light. The calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1 is disclosed, for example, at the National Astronomical Observatory of Japan, and includes the time of sunrise, south China for each geographical location (Tokyo in the case illustrated in FIG. 1) and for each month of the year. Each of the time and sunset time is included for reference. Thus, in the present invention, the intensity of the blue light is controlled for each day, for example, in correspondence with each time included in the calendar information. More specifically, in the present invention, based on the calendar information, control is performed so that the intensity of the blue light increases in a time zone in which a person is estimated to be active and active. In other words, the control is performed so that the intensity of the blue light is lowered in the time zone in which the person is estimated to be sleeping or resting.
 即ち例えば図2に例示するように、一年のうちで日照時間が短い11月から翌年2月にかけては、上記暦情報に基づき、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に低く制御する時間帯を相対的に長くすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を低減する程度を図2に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。なお図2乃至図4においては、ブルーライトの強度の低減率が大きくなるように制御する時間帯を左下ハッチングで示し、当該低減率が中程度となるように制御する時間帯を縦横ハッチングで示し、当該低減率が小さくなるように制御する時間帯を右下ハッチングで示し、ブルーライトの強度の低減を行わない(即ち低減率を0とする)ように制御する時間帯を縦ハッチングで示している。 That is, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 2, from November to February of the following year when the sunshine hours are short, the time period for controlling the intensity of blue light is relatively long based on the calendar information. At the same time, the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is reduced is controlled according to the time as shown in FIG. In FIGS. 2 to 4, the time zone that is controlled so that the reduction rate of the intensity of blue light is increased is indicated by lower left hatching, and the time zone that is controlled so that the reduction rate is intermediate is indicated by vertical and horizontal hatching. The time zone for controlling the reduction rate to be small is indicated by lower right hatching, and the time zone for controlling the blue light intensity not to be reduced (that is, the reduction rate is set to 0) is indicated by vertical hatching. Yes.
 一方図2に例示する場合に対し、一年のうちで日照時間が長い5月から8月にかけては、図3に例示するように、上記暦情報に基づいて、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に低く制御する時間帯を相対的に短くすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を低減する程度を図3に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。更に、図2に例示する期間と図3に例示する期間との間にある3月、4月、9月及び10月については、図4に例示するように、上記暦情報に基づいて、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に低く制御する時間帯を図2に例示する場合と図3に例示する場合との中間辺りとすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を低減する程度を図4に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。 On the other hand, in contrast to the case illustrated in FIG. 2, the intensity of blue light is controlled to be relatively low based on the calendar information as illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the degree of reduction of the intensity of blue light is controlled according to the time, while the time zone to be used is relatively shortened. Further, for March, April, September, and October between the period illustrated in FIG. 2 and the period illustrated in FIG. 3, as illustrated in FIG. The time zone in which the intensity of the light is controlled to be relatively low is set in the middle of the case illustrated in FIG. 2 and the case illustrated in FIG. 3, and the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is reduced is as shown in FIG. Control according to.
 なお上述した本発明の原理では、ブルーライトの強度を低減する場合について図2乃至図4を用いて説明したが、これ以外に、各例示したブルーライトの強度を相対的に強くする時間帯につき、制御しない場合よりも強度を敢えて増強することで、各例示した一日における強度の変化を実現してもよい。 In the above-described principle of the present invention, the case where the intensity of the blue light is reduced has been described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. In addition, the change in intensity in each illustrated day may be realized by intentionally increasing the intensity as compared with the case where it is not controlled.
 より具体的に、例えば図5に例示するように、上述したように日照時間が短い11月から翌年2月にかけては、上記暦情報に基づき、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に高く制御する時間帯を相対的に長くすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に増強する程度を図5に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。なお図5乃至図7においては、ブルーライトの強度の低減率が相対的に大きくなるように制御する時間帯をハッチングなしで示し、当該低減率が相対的に小さくなるように制御する時間帯を点ハッチングで示し、増強率を相対的に小さくしてブルーライトの強度を増強するように制御する時間帯を水平ハッチングで示し、増強率を相対的に大きくしてブルーライトの強度の増強するように制御する時間帯を縦ハッチングで示している。 More specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 5, as described above, from November to February of the following year when the sunshine hours are short, the time zone in which the intensity of blue light is controlled to be relatively high based on the calendar information. As shown in FIG. 5, the degree to which the intensity of the blue light is relatively increased is controlled according to the time. 5 to 7, the time zone for controlling the blue light intensity reduction rate to be relatively large is shown without hatching, and the time zone for controlling the reduction rate to be relatively small is shown. It is indicated by dot hatching, and the time zone for controlling to increase the intensity of blue light by decreasing the enhancement rate relatively is indicated by horizontal hatching, and the intensity of blue light is increased by increasing the enhancement rate relatively. The time zone to be controlled is indicated by vertical hatching.
 一方図5に例示する場合に対し、上記日照時間が長い5月から8月にかけては、図6に例示するように、上記暦情報に基づいて、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に低く制御する時間帯を相対的に短くすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を増強する程度を図6に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。更に、図5に例示する期間と図6に例示する期間との間にある3月、4月、9月及び10月については、図7に例示するように、上記暦情報に基づいて、ブルーライトの強度を相対的に低く制御する時間帯を図5に例示する場合と図6に例示する場合との中間辺りとすると共に、ブルーライトの強度を増強する程度を図7に示すように時刻に応じて制御する。 On the other hand, in the case illustrated in FIG. 5, from May to August when the sunshine hours are long, as illustrated in FIG. 6, the time for controlling the intensity of the blue light relatively low based on the calendar information. The degree of increasing the intensity of blue light while controlling the band relatively is controlled according to the time as shown in FIG. Further, for March, April, September, and October between the period illustrated in FIG. 5 and the period illustrated in FIG. 6, as illustrated in FIG. The time zone in which the light intensity is controlled to be relatively low is about the middle of the case illustrated in FIG. 5 and the case illustrated in FIG. 6, and the degree of increasing the intensity of the blue light is as shown in FIG. Control according to.
 (B)第1実施形態
 次に、上述した原理に基づく本発明に係る第1実施形態について、図8乃至図15を用いて説明する。なお、図8は第1実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図であり、図9は第1実施形態に係る制御処理を例示する図であり、図10は当該制御処理を示すフローチャートであり、図11は当該制御処理の具体例を示す図である。また、図12は第1実施形態に係る制御処理における設定画面等を例示する図であり、図13及び図14は当該制御処理における設定をそれぞれ例示する図であり、図15は当該制御処理の他の具体例を示す図である。なお、以下の説明では、第1実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の制御処理を、単に「第1実施形態に係る制御処理」と称する。
(B) First Embodiment Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention based on the above-described principle will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the display device according to the first embodiment, FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a control process according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the control process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example of the control process. 12 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen or the like in the control process according to the first embodiment. FIGS. 13 and 14 are diagrams illustrating examples of the setting in the control process. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating the control process. It is a figure which shows another specific example. In the following description, the blue light intensity control process according to the first embodiment is simply referred to as “control process according to the first embodiment”.
 図8に示すように、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1は、画像生成部1と、CPU、ROM(Read Only Memory)及びRAM(Random Access Memory)等により構成される制御部2と、切換制御部3と、上記ブルーライトを発生(発光)するLEDであるバックライトを有する液晶ディスプレイ等からなるディスプレイ4と、ハードディスク等の記録媒体により構成され、後述する制御率テーブルを不揮発性に記録する記録部5と、画素値更新部6と、切換部7と、ディスプレイ4の位置を検出して当該位置を示す位置データSposを出力する位置検出部8と、キーボード、マウス又はタッチパネル等から成り、表示装置D1としての処理を指定する操作信号Sopを生成する入力部9と、上記位置データSposにより示される位置における時刻に関する時刻データStを取得する時刻取得部10と、により構成されている。 As shown in FIG. 8, the display device D1 according to the first embodiment is switched between an image generation unit 1, a control unit 2 including a CPU, a ROM (Read Only Memory), a RAM (Random Access Memory), and the like. The control unit 3 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like having a backlight that is an LED that generates (emits) blue light, and a recording medium such as a hard disk, and records a control rate table, which will be described later, in a nonvolatile manner. The recording unit 5, the pixel value update unit 6, the switching unit 7, a position detection unit 8 that detects the position of the display 4 and outputs position data Spos indicating the position, a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, etc. The input unit 9 that generates an operation signal Sop that specifies processing as the display device D1, and the time at the position indicated by the position data Spos A time acquisition unit 10 for acquiring data St, and is made of.
 このとき、ディスプレイ4が本発明に係る「表示手段」の一例に相当し、切換制御部3が本発明に係る「画像情報取得手段」の一例に相当し、時刻取得部10が本発明に係る「時情報取得手段」の一例に相当する。また、画素値更新部6が本発明に係る「処理手段」の一例に相当し、入力部9が本発明に係る「指定手段」の一例に相当し、位置検出部8が本発明に係る「位置情報取得手段」の一例に相当する。 At this time, the display 4 corresponds to an example of the “display unit” according to the present invention, the switching control unit 3 corresponds to an example of the “image information acquisition unit” according to the present invention, and the time acquisition unit 10 according to the present invention. This corresponds to an example of “time information acquisition means”. Further, the pixel value update unit 6 corresponds to an example of a “processing unit” according to the present invention, the input unit 9 corresponds to an example of a “designating unit” according to the present invention, and the position detection unit 8 includes “ This corresponds to an example of “position information acquisition means”.
 この構成において画像生成部1は、ディスプレイ4に表示されるべき画像(静止画又は動画の少なくともいずれか一方を含む。以下同様。)に相当する画像情報Sinを生成して切換制御部3に出力する。一方記録部5は、第1実施形態に係る制御処理のための予め設定された制御率テーブルであって、上記画像における青色成分を制御する際に用いられる低減率パラメータを少なくとも含む制御率テーブルを、不揮発性にn個(nは自然数。以下、同様。)記録している。なお、各制御率テーブルについては、後ほど詳述する。 In this configuration, the image generation unit 1 generates image information Sin corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display 4 (including at least one of a still image and a moving image; the same applies hereinafter) and outputs the image information Sin to the switching control unit 3. To do. On the other hand, the recording unit 5 is a preset control rate table for the control processing according to the first embodiment, and includes a control rate table including at least a reduction rate parameter used when controlling the blue component in the image. Non-volatile recording is performed (n is a natural number, the same applies hereinafter). Each control rate table will be described in detail later.
 一方入力部9は、ユーザの操作に基づき、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを示す信号、及び当該制御処理を実行する場合において当該制御処理に用いられる上記制御率テーブルを指定するための信号を含む操作信号Sopを生成して制御部2に出力する。このとき、ディスプレイ4に表示する画像が例えば映画に相当する画像である場合は、その画質等を維持すべく、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行しない旨の操作が入力部9において行われるのが好ましい。これに対して、ディスプレイ4に表示する画像が例えば事務用の文書に相当する画像である場合は、第1実施形態に係る制御処理により有効にブルーライトの強度を制御すべく、当該制御処理を実行する旨の操作が入力部9において行われるのが好ましい。また、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合には、その制御率(即ち、ブルーライトの強度を増強する場合はその増強率であり、ブルーライトの強度を低減する場合はその低減率となる)を選択する操作を反映した上記操作信号Sopが生成/出力されることになる。 On the other hand, the input unit 9 receives a signal indicating whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment based on a user operation, and the control rate table used for the control process when the control process is executed. An operation signal Sop including a signal for designating is generated and output to the control unit 2. At this time, if the image displayed on the display 4 is, for example, an image corresponding to a movie, an operation for not executing the control processing according to the first embodiment is performed in the input unit 9 in order to maintain the image quality and the like. Is preferred. On the other hand, when the image displayed on the display 4 is an image corresponding to, for example, an office document, the control process is performed in order to effectively control the intensity of the blue light by the control process according to the first embodiment. It is preferable that an operation to be executed is performed in the input unit 9. Further, when executing the control processing according to the first embodiment, the control rate (that is, the enhancement rate when the intensity of blue light is enhanced, and the reduction rate when the intensity of blue light is reduced). The operation signal Sop that reflects the operation of selecting (to be) is generated / output.
 他方位置検出部8は、例えばGPS(Global Positioning System)を用いた自動検出、又はユーザの入力操作に基づいて上記位置データSposを生成し、制御部2に出力する。更に時刻取得部10は、例えば図示しないタイマから現在時刻を示す時刻データStを取得し、制御部2に出力する。この場合に時刻取得部10は、上記現在時刻の他に、現在時刻以外の例えばユーザが指定した時刻を示す時刻データStを取得して制御部2に出力してもよい。 The other position detection unit 8 generates the position data Spos based on, for example, automatic detection using GPS (Global Positioning System) or user input operation, and outputs the position data Spos to the control unit 2. Further, the time acquisition unit 10 acquires time data St indicating the current time from a timer (not shown), for example, and outputs it to the control unit 2. In this case, the time acquisition unit 10 may acquire time data St indicating a time specified by the user other than the current time, for example, other than the current time, and output the time data St to the control unit 2.
 これらにより制御部2は、上記操作信号Sop、位置データSpos及び時刻データStに基づき、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを示すオン/オフ信号、及び当該制御処理を実行する場合において当該制御処理に用いられる上記制御率テーブルを指定するためのテーブル指定信号をそれぞれ含む制御信号Scを生成する。この場合制御部2は、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合においては、位置データSposにより示される位置(例えば東京)、及び時刻データStにより示される時刻に基づき、その位置及び時刻に対応した制御率テーブルを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を生成する。その後制御部2は、上記オン/オフ信号を切換制御部3及び切換部7に、上記テーブル指定信号を上記記録部5に、それぞれ出力する。 Accordingly, the control unit 2 executes the on / off signal indicating whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment, and the control process based on the operation signal Sop, the position data Spos, and the time data St. In some cases, a control signal Sc including a table designating signal for designating the control rate table used for the control process is generated. In this case, when executing the control processing according to the first embodiment, the control unit 2 determines the position and time based on the position indicated by the position data Spos (for example, Tokyo) and the time indicated by the time data St. The table specifying signal for specifying the corresponding control rate table is generated. Thereafter, the control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7, and outputs the table designation signal to the recording unit 5.
 これにより切換制御部3は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、画像情報Sinについて第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを判定し、実行する場合は画像情報Sinを画素値更新部6に出力する。一方当該制御処理を実行しない場合、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinをそのまま切換部7に出力する。 Thereby, the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and if so, the image information Sin. Is output to the pixel value update unit 6. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed, the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the switching unit 7 as it is.
 次に記録部5は、制御部2からの上記テーブル指定信号により指定されている制御率テーブルに含まれる制御率パラメータを、画素値更新部6に出力する。 Next, the recording unit 5 outputs the control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal from the control unit 2 to the pixel value updating unit 6.
 これらにより画素値更新部6は、切換制御部3から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における赤色成分、青色成分及び緑色成分それぞれの画素値(より具体的には、例えば輝度)を、記録部5から出力された制御率テーブルにより示される画素値に更新し、更新画像情報Sbcとして切換部7に出力する。ここで、上記画素値(又は輝度)の上限値は階調数によって決定され、ディスプレイ4が液晶ディスプレイにより構成される場合には、RGB色空間を用いる24ビットの液晶ディスプレイであればその上限値は三色の色成分ごとに「255(2-1)」であり、同様の色空間を用いる18ビットの液晶ディスプレイであればその上限値は三色の色成分ごとに「63(2-1)」である。 Accordingly, the pixel value update unit 6 causes the pixel values of the red component, the blue component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 (more specifically, for example, luminance ) Is updated to the pixel value indicated by the control rate table output from the recording unit 5 and output to the switching unit 7 as updated image information Sbc. Here, the upper limit value of the pixel value (or luminance) is determined by the number of gradations, and when the display 4 is configured by a liquid crystal display, if the display 4 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space, the upper limit value is set. Is “255 (2 8 −1)” for each of the three color components, and an upper limit value of “63 (2 6 -6)” for each of the three color components is an 18-bit liquid crystal display using the same color space. -1) ".
 そして切換部7は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を行わない場合には、切換制御部3からの画像情報Sinをそのまま表示情報Soutとしてディスプレイ4に出力する。これに対して第1実施形態に係る制御処理を行う場合には、画素値更新部6からの上記更新画像情報Sbcを表示情報Soutとしてディスプレイ4に出力する。 The switching unit 7 displays the image information Sin from the switching control unit 3 as it is as display information Sout when the control processing according to the first embodiment is not performed based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2. 4 is output. On the other hand, when the control processing according to the first embodiment is performed, the updated image information Sbc from the pixel value update unit 6 is output to the display 4 as display information Sout.
 最後にディスプレイ4は、切換部7から出力されてきた表示情報Soutに相当する画像を表示する。 Finally, the display 4 displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout output from the switching unit 7.
 次に、第1実施形態に係る制御処理に用いられる上記制御率テーブルについて、図9を用いて説明する。 Next, the control rate table used in the control process according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
 第1実施形態に係る制御処理では、上記背景技術として説明した特別な光学部品を別途使用することなく、表示装置D1としての色調整処理により、画像情報Sinに相当する画像におけるブルーライトの強度を時間に応じて制御する。なお以下の説明における「低減率」及び「増強率」とは、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を行わない場合における入力画像(画像情報Sin)の各画素値を「1」とし、以下の式により定義されるパラメータである。 In the control processing according to the first embodiment, the intensity of the blue light in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is adjusted by the color adjustment processing as the display device D1 without separately using the special optical component described as the background art. Control according to time. The “reduction rate” and “enhancement rate” in the following description are “1” for each pixel value of the input image (image information Sin) when the control processing according to the first embodiment is not performed. Is a parameter defined by
 低減率[%]={1-(出力画素値/入力画素値)}×100
 増強率[%]={(出力画素値/入力画素値)-1}×100
 このとき、上記バックライトの明るさと表示された画像の輝度が比例関係でない場合があることにより、画像情報としての低減率又は増強率と、実際にディスプレイ4に画像を表示した際にディスプレイ4から発生するエネルギーの低減率又は増強率と、は異なることに注意を要する。
Reduction rate [%] = {1− (output pixel value / input pixel value)} × 100
Enhancement rate [%] = {(output pixel value / input pixel value) −1} × 100
At this time, since the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the displayed image may not be in a proportional relationship, the reduction rate or enhancement rate as the image information and the display 4 when the image is actually displayed on the display 4 Note that it is different from the rate of reduction or enhancement of the energy generated.
 先ず、画像情報Sinにおける各画素におけるブルーライトの強度を低減する場合について図9(a)に例示するように、横軸を入力画素値とし、縦軸を出力画素値とすると、第1実施形態に係る制御処理のうちブルーライトの強度の低減処理(以下第1実施形態において、単に「低減処理」と称する)では、図9において破線で示す原画(即ち、上記画像情報Sinに相当する画像)に対して、青色成分(図9において「B」と示す)の低減率が他の色成分(赤色成分(図9(a)において「R」と示す)及び緑色成分(図9(a)において「G」と示す))の低減率よりも大きくなるように、上記画素値更新部6において各色成分の輝度を更新し、上記更新画像情報Sbcとして切換部7に出力する。この低減処理は、例えば画素ごとに実行される。ここで、上記青色成分の波長は例えば440ナノメートル乃至490ナノメートル程度であり、上記赤色成分の波長は例えば620ナノメートル乃至740ナノメートル程度であり、上記緑色成分の波長は例えば500ナノメートル乃至600ナノメートル程度である。また図9(a)において、赤色成分及び緑色成分のグラフが例えば出力画素値=入力画素値×0.9で表されるとすると、当該赤色成分及び緑色成分それぞれにおける低減率は10%((1-0.9)×100)となり、また青色成分のグラフが例えば出力画素値=入力画素値×0.75で表されるとすると、当該青色成分における低減率は25%((1-0.75)×100)となる。図9(a)からも明らかなように、第1実施形態に係る低減処理においては、青色成分だけでなく赤色成分及び緑色成分についてもそれぞれ低減するが、それらの低減率については、青色成分が他の色成分よりも大きいものとされている。 First, in the case of reducing the intensity of blue light at each pixel in the image information Sin, as illustrated in FIG. 9A, when the horizontal axis is an input pixel value and the vertical axis is an output pixel value, the first embodiment In the blue light intensity reduction processing (hereinafter simply referred to as “reduction processing” in the first embodiment) in the control processing according to FIG. 9, the original image indicated by the broken line in FIG. 9 (that is, the image corresponding to the image information Sin). In contrast, the reduction rate of the blue component (shown as “B” in FIG. 9) is different from that of the other color components (red component (shown as “R” in FIG. 9A)) and green component (shown in FIG. 9A). The pixel value updating unit 6 updates the luminance of each color component so as to be larger than the reduction rate of “G”)), and outputs the updated image information Sbc to the switching unit 7. This reduction process is executed for each pixel, for example. Here, the wavelength of the blue component is, for example, about 440 nanometers to 490 nanometers, the wavelength of the red component is, for example, about 620 nanometers to 740 nanometers, and the wavelength of the green component is, for example, about 500 nanometers to It is about 600 nanometers. Further, in FIG. 9A, if the graph of the red component and the green component is represented by, for example, output pixel value = input pixel value × 0.9, the reduction rate for each of the red component and the green component is 10% (( 1−0.9) × 100), and if the blue component graph is expressed by, for example, output pixel value = input pixel value × 0.75, the reduction rate of the blue component is 25% ((1-0) .75) × 100). As is clear from FIG. 9A, in the reduction process according to the first embodiment, not only the blue component but also the red component and the green component are reduced respectively. It is assumed to be larger than other color components.
 なお、図9(a)において、青色成分のみを低減することも可能であるが、その場合には画像全体としての色味が変化してしまい(より具体的には、黄色がかってしまい)、表示装置D1としては好ましくない。そこで第1実施形態に係る低減処理では、青色成分だけでなく、図9(a)に例示するように赤色成分及び緑色成分も低減させる。これにより、画像全体としての色味の変化を抑制しつつ、有害なブルーライトを低減することができる。なおこのとき、画像の内容によっては、上述した青色成分のみの低減を行ってもよい場合(換言すれば、赤色成分及び緑色成分それぞれにおける低減率はゼロとする(赤色成分及び緑色成分を低減しない)場合)もあり得る。そしてこの場合についても、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1では、青色成分のみを低減するための制御率テーブルを選択することで、これを可能とすることができる。なお上記低減処理は、上述したRGB色空間以外にも、例えばいわゆるHLS(Hue、Luminance、Saturation)色空間、HSV(Hue、Saturation、Value)色空間、又は輝度(Y)を含むYCbCr色空間等に対しても同様に適用可能である。 In FIG. 9A, it is possible to reduce only the blue component, but in that case, the color of the entire image changes (more specifically, yellowish), It is not preferable as the display device D1. Therefore, in the reduction process according to the first embodiment, not only the blue component but also the red component and the green component are reduced as illustrated in FIG. Thereby, harmful blue light can be reduced while suppressing a change in color of the entire image. At this time, depending on the content of the image, the above-described reduction of only the blue component may be performed (in other words, the reduction rate in each of the red component and the green component is zero (the red component and the green component are not reduced). ) If possible. Also in this case, the display device D1 according to the first embodiment can make this possible by selecting a control rate table for reducing only the blue component. In addition to the RGB color space described above, the reduction processing is performed, for example, a so-called HLS (Hue, Luminance, Saturation) color space, HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value) color space, or a YCbCr color space including luminance (Y). The same applies to the above.
 次に、画像情報Sinにおける各画素におけるブルーライトの強度を増強する場合について図9(b)に例示するように、図9(a)の場合と同様に横軸を入力画素値とし、縦軸を出力画素値とすると、第1実施形態に係る制御処理のうちブルーライトの強度の増強処理(以下第1実施形態において、単に「増強処理」と称する)では、破線で示す原画に対して、青色成分が原画よりも大きくなるように、上記画素値更新部6において青色成分の輝度を更新し、上記更新画像情報Sbcとして切換部7に出力する。この増強処理も、上記低減処理と同様に例えば画素ごとに実行される。 Next, in the case where the intensity of blue light in each pixel in the image information Sin is increased, as illustrated in FIG. 9B, the horizontal axis is the input pixel value as in FIG. 9A, and the vertical axis In the control process according to the first embodiment, the blue light intensity enhancement process (hereinafter simply referred to as “enhancement process” in the first embodiment) in the control process according to the first embodiment, The pixel value updating unit 6 updates the luminance of the blue component so that the blue component is larger than the original image, and outputs the updated image information Sbc to the switching unit 7. This enhancement process is also executed for each pixel, for example, in the same manner as the reduction process.
 そして、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1の記録部5には、図9にそれぞれ例示した第1実施形態の趣旨を、異なる日及び時刻についてそれぞれ示す制御率パラメータを含む制御率テーブルが、例えば図8に例示するように第1制御率テーブルT1、第2制御率テーブルT2、第3制御率テーブルT3、…、第n制御率テーブルTnとして予め記録されている。このとき上記「制御率」には、上記低減処理を実行する場合の青色成分の低減率と、上記増強処理を実行する場合の青色成分の増強率と、の双方が含まれている。また、日及び時刻ごとの制御率テーブルにおける制御率パラメータのそれぞれは、図1に例示する暦情報に基づき、一日における第1実施形態に係る制御処理が図2乃至図4のいずれかに例示する制御態様で季節ごとに実行される値とされている。これら制御率パラメータの実際の値は、上記暦情報に基づき、例えば実験的或いは経験的に予め定められることが考えられる。 In the recording unit 5 of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment, a control rate table including control rate parameters respectively indicating the purpose of the first embodiment illustrated in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 8, the first control rate table T1, the second control rate table T2, the third control rate table T3,..., And the nth control rate table Tn are recorded in advance. At this time, the “control rate” includes both the blue component reduction rate when the reduction process is executed and the blue component enhancement rate when the enhancement process is executed. Further, each of the control rate parameters in the control rate table for each day and time is based on the calendar information illustrated in FIG. 1, and the control processing according to the first embodiment for one day is illustrated in any of FIGS. The control mode is a value that is executed for each season. The actual values of these control rate parameters can be determined in advance experimentally or empirically based on the calendar information.
 次に、第1実施形態に係る制御処理について、より具体的に図10を用いて説明する。なお図10に示す当該制御処理は、例えば表示装置D1の電源スイッチがオンとされたタイミングから開始され、主として制御部2を中心として実行される。 Next, the control process according to the first embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. Note that the control process shown in FIG. 10 is started, for example, from the timing when the power switch of the display device D1 is turned on, and is executed mainly with the control unit 2 as the center.
 図10に示すように、第1実施形態に係る制御処理においては初めに、位置検出部8からの位置データSposにより示される(ディスプレイ4の)位置、及び時刻取得部10からの時刻データStにより示される日時を取得する(ステップS1)。これにより制御部2は、上記オン/オフ信号を制御信号Scとして切換制御部3及び切換部7に出力すると共に、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合において当該制御処理に用いられる制御率テーブルを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を含む制御信号Scを記録部5に出力する。 As shown in FIG. 10, in the control process according to the first embodiment, first, the position (of the display 4) indicated by the position data Spos from the position detection unit 8 and the time data St from the time acquisition unit 10 are used. The indicated date and time is acquired (step S1). As a result, the control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal as the control signal Sc to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7 and controls the control process used when the control process according to the first embodiment is executed. A control signal Sc including the table designating signal for designating the rate table is output to the recording unit 5.
 次に、画像生成部1から上記画像情報Sinが入力されると、最初に切換制御部3に取り込まれる(ステップS2)。そして切換制御部3は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、画像情報Sinについて第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを判定する(ステップS3)。ステップS3の判定において当該制御処理を実行する場合(ステップS3;YES)、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinを画素値更新部6に出力する。一方、ステップS3の判定において当該制御処理を実行しない場合(ステップS3;NO)、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinをそのまま切換部7に出力する(ステップS6)。 Next, when the image information Sin is input from the image generation unit 1, it is first taken into the switching control unit 3 (step S2). Then, the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the first embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2 (step S3). When the control process is executed in the determination in step S3 (step S3; YES), the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the pixel value update unit 6. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed in the determination in step S3 (step S3; NO), the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the switching unit 7 (step S6).
 これらと並行して記録部5では、制御部2からの上記テーブル指定信号により示されている制御率テーブルの選定(換言すれば、低減率又は増強率の指定)が行われ(ステップS4)、テーブル指定信号により指定された制御率テーブルに含まれる制御率パラメータが画素値更新部6に出力される。 In parallel to these, the recording unit 5 selects a control rate table (in other words, specifies a reduction rate or an enhancement rate) indicated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 (step S4). The control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal is output to the pixel value update unit 6.
 これらにより画素値更新部6は、切換制御部3から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における青色成分、赤色成分及び緑色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部5から出力された制御率テーブルにより示される画素値に更新し(ステップS5)、更新画像情報Sbcとして切換部7に出力する。 Accordingly, the pixel value update unit 6 outputs the pixel values of the blue component, the red component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 from the recording unit 5. The pixel value indicated by the control rate table is updated (step S5), and the updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7.
 そして切換部7は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、切換制御部3側と画素値更新部6側とを切り換えて、表示情報Soutをディスプレイ4に出力して表示させる(ステップS6)。 Then, the switching unit 7 switches between the switching control unit 3 side and the pixel value updating unit 6 side based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and outputs and displays the display information Sout on the display 4 (step). S6).
 以上説明した第1実施形態に係る制御処理が実行されると、例えば図11に例示するように、一日のうちの時刻(図11における横軸)に基づき、その時刻においてディスプレイ4を使用する場合の青色成分の強度(図11における縦軸)が、図1に例示した暦情報に基づいて図2乃至図7に例示した態様で変化する。なお図11に例示する場合、0時付近の○は暦情報における前日の日の入りの時刻と当日の日の出の時刻とに基づいて設定される青色成分の強度を示し、6時付近の○は暦情報における当日の日の出の時刻に相当する時刻における青色成分の強度を示し、18時付近の○は暦情報における当日の日の入りの時刻に相当する時刻における青色成分の強度を示し、12時付近の○は暦情報における当日の南中時刻に相当する時刻における青色成分の強度を示し、24時付近の○は暦情報における当日の日の入りの時刻と翌日の日の出の時刻とに基づいて設定される青色成分の強度を示す。 When the control process according to the first embodiment described above is executed, the display 4 is used at that time based on the time of day (horizontal axis in FIG. 11), for example, as illustrated in FIG. The intensity of the blue component in the case (vertical axis in FIG. 11) changes in the manner illustrated in FIGS. 2 to 7 based on the calendar information illustrated in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11, “o” around 0:00 indicates the intensity of the blue component set based on the sunset time of the previous day and the sunrise time of the day in the calendar information, and “o” around 6 o'clock indicates the calendar information. Indicates the intensity of the blue component at a time corresponding to the sunrise time of the day, and ○ near 18:00 indicates the intensity of the blue component at a time corresponding to the sunset time of the day in the calendar information, and ○ near 12:00 indicates Indicate the intensity of the blue component at the time corresponding to the time of the day in the calendar information. The circle around 24:00 indicates the blue component set based on the sunset time of the day and the sunrise time of the next day in the calendar information. Indicates strength.
 ここで上述した第1実施形態では、一日のうちの青色成分の制御率を時刻に応じて自動的に制御することとしたが、例えば図11に●で示す時刻又は上記○で示す時刻それぞれにおける青色成分の強度を、例えば入力部9を用いてユーザが任意に指定するように構成してもよい。より具体的に例えば、第1実施形態に係る制御処理の趣旨が体内リズム等の維持/調整であることに鑑み、青色成分の増強、低減、不変更等のために推奨される設定時間帯幅や選択肢をユーザに提示し、そこから当該ユーザが自身の生活パターン等に応じて上記増強処理又は低減処理を行う時間帯、及び増強又は低減の程度を指定するように構成することができる。即ち例えば、「起床から○○時間は××%程度増強し、就寝前の△△時間は●●%程度低減する」等を推奨設定として提示し、その中からユーザが調整時間を選択するといったユーザインターフェースとすることが好適である。 In the first embodiment described above, the control rate of the blue component of the day is automatically controlled according to the time. For example, the time indicated by ● or the time indicated by ○ in FIG. For example, the user may arbitrarily specify the intensity of the blue component at the input unit 9. More specifically, for example, considering that the purpose of the control processing according to the first embodiment is maintenance / adjustment of the internal rhythm, etc., the set time period recommended for the enhancement, reduction, non-change, etc. of the blue component The user can be presented with the options and the user can specify the time zone during which the enhancement process or the reduction process is performed according to his / her own life pattern and the like, and the degree of the enhancement or reduction. That is, for example, “The time from wake-up is increased by about XX% and the time before bedtime is reduced by about ●●%” is suggested as a recommended setting, and the user selects an adjustment time from the recommended settings. A user interface is preferable.
 次に当該ユーザインターフェースの一例について、具体的に図12乃至図14を用いて説明する。即ち、ある日及び時刻の制御率テーブルにより示されている青色成分の強度のユーザによる変更を可能とする場合、当該制御率テーブルに相当した一日の青色成分の強度変化を含むインターフェース画面SGが、図12(a)に例示するようにディスプレイ4に表示される。なお図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SG上には、当該インターフェース画面SGに対応する制御率テーブルにより示される青色成分の強度を例えば二時間ごとに示す●を含むグラフが表示されており、更に各時刻の青色成分の強度(●)を変更する際に操作されるカーソルCも合わせて表示される。また、当該カーソルCを用いた入力部9における操作により各時刻の青色成分の強度を任意にユーザが変更できることを示す凡例NTも合わせて表示される。このとき、図12(a)に例示する凡例NTでは、各時刻の青色成分の強度を示す●が、当該強度を変える方向(インターフェース画面SGにおける図12(a)中上下方向)、又は当該強度となる時刻を変える方向(即ちインターフェース画面SGにおける図12(a)中左右方向)のいずれかに移動可能であることが、それぞれ破線両矢印により示されている。 Next, an example of the user interface will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. That is, when the user can change the intensity of the blue component indicated by the control rate table for a certain day and time, the interface screen SG including the change in the intensity of the blue component of the day corresponding to the control rate table is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12A, it is displayed on the display 4. In addition, on the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12A, a graph including, for example, ● indicating the intensity of the blue component indicated by the control rate table corresponding to the interface screen SG every two hours is displayed. In addition, a cursor C operated when changing the intensity (●) of the blue component at each time is also displayed. A legend NT indicating that the user can arbitrarily change the intensity of the blue component at each time by an operation on the input unit 9 using the cursor C is also displayed. At this time, in the legend NT illustrated in FIG. 12A, the ● indicating the intensity of the blue component at each time is the direction in which the intensity is changed (the vertical direction in FIG. 12A in the interface screen SG) or the intensity. It is indicated by a broken line double-pointed arrow that it can move in any of the directions for changing the time (that is, the horizontal direction in FIG. 12A on the interface screen SG).
 次に、図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で、ユーザが第1例として、対応する制御率テーブルにおける16時の青色成分の強度が18時頃の強度となるように、時間的に後にずらしたいと考えたとする。この場合に当該ユーザは、図12(b)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で、入力部9を構成する図示しない例えばマウスの操作により、16時の青色成分の強度を示すポイントP2の位置にカーソルCを移動させる。そして当該ユーザは、例えば上記マウスにおけるクリック操作により当該ポイントP2を選択した後、当該選択のままカーソルCを図12(b)に破線矢印で示すように右方向に18時頃に相当する位置まで移動させる。この操作により、図12(b)に破線のポイントP2で例示される元の16時の青色成分の強度が、図12(b)に実線のポイントP2で例示される18時頃の青色成分の強度となるように指定される。なお、ポイントP2近辺の他のポイントP1、ポイントP3及びポイントP4それぞれに対応する青色成分の強度については、図12(b)に例示するように、当該ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度の変化(ポイントP2の移動)に伴って、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線全体が滑らかな変化を維持するように、各ポイントP1、ポイントP3及びポイントP4それぞれに相当する青色成分の強度を変化させるのが好適である。またこの他に図12(c)に例示するように、ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度のみを変化させることで、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線が、ポイントP1(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度→実線で示されるポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度→ポイントP3(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度、と変化するように青色成分の強度を変化させるようにしてもよい。そして、図12(b)又は図12(c)に例示する変更後の青色成分の強度に対応する制御率テーブルの記述内容(制御率パラメータ)は、記録部5に記録され、第1実施形態に係る制御処理に供される。 Next, in a state where the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12A is displayed on the display 4, the user has, as a first example, the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table is around 18:00. Suppose that we want to shift later in time so that it becomes stronger. In this case, when the user displays the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12B on the display 4, the user operates, for example, a mouse (not shown) constituting the input unit 9 to intensify the blue component at 16:00. The cursor C is moved to the position of the point P2 indicating. Then, for example, after the user selects the point P2 by a click operation with the mouse, the user moves the cursor C to the position corresponding to about 18 o'clock in the right direction as indicated by a broken line arrow in FIG. Move. By this operation, the intensity of the original 16 o'clock blue component illustrated by the dashed point P2 in FIG. 12B is changed to that of the blue component around 18 o'clock illustrated by the solid point P2 in FIG. It is specified to be strength. Regarding the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the other points P1, P3, and P4 in the vicinity of the point P2, as illustrated in FIG. 12B, the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 is illustrated. In accordance with (movement of the point P2), the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the points P1, P3, and P4 is changed so that the entire curve indicating the change in intensity of the blue component maintains a smooth change. Is preferred. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 12C, a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant). The intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant). Then, the description content (control rate parameter) of the control rate table corresponding to the intensity of the blue component after change illustrated in FIG. 12B or FIG. 12C is recorded in the recording unit 5 and is used in the first embodiment. It is provided for the control processing concerning.
 次に、図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で、ユーザが第2例として、対応する制御率テーブルにおける16時の青色成分の強度を(時刻をずらさずに)下げたいと考えたとする。この場合に当該ユーザは、図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で例えば上記マウスの操作により、16時の青色成分の強度を示すポイントP2の位置にカーソルCを移動させる。そして、例えば上記クリック操作によりポイントP2を選択した後、当該選択のままカーソルCを図13(a)に破線矢印で示すように所望の青色成分の強度の位置まで下方向に移動させる。この操作により、図13(a)に破線のポイントP2で例示される元の16時の青色成分の強度が、図13(a)に実線のポイントP2で例示される(弱い)青色成分の強度となるように指定される。なお、ポイントP2近辺の他のポイントP1及びポイントP3それぞれに対応する青色成分の強度については、図13(a)に例示するように、当該ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度の変化(ポイントP2の移動)に伴って、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線全体が滑らかな変化を維持するようにポイントP1及びポイントP3それぞれに相当する青色成分の強度を変化させるのが好適である。またこの他に図13(b)に例示するように、ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度のみを変化させることで、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線が、ポイントP1(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度→実線で示されるポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度→ポイントP3(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度、と変化するように青色成分の強度を変化させるようにしてもよい。そして、図13(a)又は図13(b)に例示する変更後の青色成分の強度に対応する制御率テーブルの記述内容(制御率パラメータ)は、記録部5に記録され、第1実施形態に係る制御処理に供される。 Next, in a state where the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12A is displayed on the display 4, as a second example, the user shifts the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table (shifts the time). Suppose you want to lower). In this case, the user moves the cursor to the position of the point P2 indicating the intensity of the blue component at 16:00, for example, by operating the mouse while the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. Move C. Then, for example, after the point P2 is selected by the click operation, the cursor C is moved downward to the position of the intensity of the desired blue component as indicated by the dashed arrow in FIG. By this operation, the intensity of the original 16 o'clock blue component illustrated by the dashed point P2 in FIG. 13A is changed to the intensity of the (weak) blue component illustrated by the solid line point P2 in FIG. 13A. To be specified. Regarding the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the other points P1 and P3 in the vicinity of the point P2, as illustrated in FIG. 13A, the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 (point P2). It is preferable to change the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the points P1 and P3 so that the entire curve showing the change in intensity of the blue component maintains a smooth change. In addition to this, as illustrated in FIG. 13B, a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant). The intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant). And the description content (control rate parameter) of the control rate table corresponding to the intensity | strength of the blue component after the change illustrated to FIG. 13A or FIG. 13B is recorded on the recording part 5, and 1st Embodiment It is provided for the control processing concerning.
 最後に、図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で、ユーザが第3例として、対応する制御率テーブルにおける16時の青色成分の強度を弱めて、且つ当該弱めた強度が18時頃の強度となるようにずらしたいと考えたとする。この場合に当該ユーザは、図12(a)に例示するインターフェース画面SGがディスプレイ4に表示されている状態で例えば上記マウスの操作により、16時の青色成分の強度を示すポイントP2の位置にカーソルCを移動させる。そして、例えば上記クリック操作によりポイントP2を選択した後、18時頃に相当する位置まで当該ポイントP2を移動させるための右方向の移動と、所望の青色成分の強度の位置まで当該ポイントP2を移動させるための下方向の移動と、を合わせて、当該選択のままカーソルCを図14(a)に破線矢印で示すように斜め右下方向に移動させる。この操作により、図14(a)に破線のポイントP2で例示される元の16時の青色成分の強度が、図14(a)に実線のポイントP2で例示される18時頃の(弱い)青色成分の強度となるように指定される。なお、ポイントP2近辺の他のポイントP1及びポイントP3それぞれに対応する青色成分の強度については、図14(a)に例示するように、当該ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度の変化(ポイントP2の移動)に伴って、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線全体が滑らかな変化を維持するようにポイントP1及びポイントP3それぞれに相当する青色成分の強度を変化させるのが好適である。またこの他に図14(b)に例示するように、ポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度のみを変化させることで、青色成分の強度の変化を示す曲線が、ポイントP1(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度→実線で示されるポイントP2に対応する青色成分の強度→ポイントP3(不変)に対応する青色成分の強度、と変化するように青色成分の強度を変化させるようにしてもよい。そして、図14(a)又は図14(b)に例示する変更後の青色成分の強度に対応する制御率テーブルの記述内容(制御率パラメータ)は、記録部5に記録され、第1実施形態に係る制御処理に供される。 Finally, in a state where the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. 12A is displayed on the display 4, the user decreases the intensity of the blue component at 16:00 in the corresponding control rate table as a third example, and Suppose that it is desired to shift the weakened strength to a strength around 18:00. In this case, the user moves the cursor to the position of the point P2 indicating the intensity of the blue component at 16:00, for example, by operating the mouse while the interface screen SG illustrated in FIG. Move C. Then, for example, after selecting the point P2 by the above click operation, the point P2 is moved to the position corresponding to about 18 o'clock and moved to the position corresponding to the intensity of the desired blue component. The cursor C is moved obliquely in the lower right direction as indicated by the broken line arrow in FIG. By this operation, the intensity of the original 16 o'clock blue component illustrated by the dashed point P2 in FIG. 14A is (weak) around 18 o'clock illustrated by the solid point P2 in FIG. 14A. Designated to be the intensity of the blue component. Regarding the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the other points P1 and P3 in the vicinity of the point P2, as illustrated in FIG. 14A, the change in the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 (point P2). It is preferable to change the intensity of the blue component corresponding to each of the points P1 and P3 so that the entire curve showing the change in intensity of the blue component maintains a smooth change. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 14B, a curve indicating a change in the intensity of the blue component by changing only the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 corresponds to the point P1 (invariant). The intensity of the blue component may be changed such that the intensity of the blue component → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P2 indicated by the solid line → the intensity of the blue component corresponding to the point P3 (invariant). Then, the description content (control rate parameter) of the control rate table corresponding to the intensity of the changed blue component illustrated in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B is recorded in the recording unit 5 and is used in the first embodiment. It is provided for the control processing concerning.
 なお上述と同様に、図15に例示するように、第1実施形態に係る制御処理のうち青色成分の増強処理のみを実行する場合(図15(a))、又は当該青色成分の低減処理のみを実行する場合(図15(b))、のいずれについても、制御率テーブルの記述内容を用いて自動的に制御することもできるし、ユーザの指定操作により、それぞれの制御処理を実行するように構成することもできる。なお図15に例示する場合において、○及び●それぞれの意味は、上述した図11に例示する場合と同様である。 Similarly to the above, as illustrated in FIG. 15, only the blue component enhancement process is executed in the control process according to the first embodiment (FIG. 15A), or only the blue component reduction process is performed. Can be automatically controlled using the description contents of the control rate table, and each control process can be executed by the user's designated operation. It can also be configured. In the case illustrated in FIG. 15, the meanings of ◯ and ● are the same as those illustrated in FIG. 11 described above.
 更に上述した第1実施形態では、主として青色成分についてのみ、その増強又は低減を含む制御処理の対象とすることとしたが、これ以外に、青色成分以外の色成分も合わせて、或いは青色成分以外の色成分のみを対象として、それぞれ時刻に応じてその増強又は低減を行うように構成してもよい。この場合も、第1実施形態と同様の制御率テーブルを色成分ごとに設定/記録することにより、それぞれの色成分に対する制御処理が可能となる。 Further, in the first embodiment described above, only the blue component is mainly subjected to control processing including enhancement or reduction. However, in addition to this, color components other than the blue component are combined or other than the blue component. It is also possible to configure such that only the color component is enhanced or reduced according to time. Also in this case, control processing for each color component can be performed by setting / recording a control rate table similar to that of the first embodiment for each color component.
 以上説明したように、第1実施形態に係る制御処理によれば、画像情報Sinにおけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を時刻に対応した制御率テーブルに基づいて制御して更新画像情報Sbc及び表示情報Soutを生成するので、表示情報Soutに相当する画像を視認するユーザの、視覚を通じた体内リズム等を良好に維持させることができる。 As described above, according to the control process according to the first embodiment, the brightness corresponding to any color component in the image information Sin is controlled based on the control rate table corresponding to the time, and the updated image information Sbc and Since the display information Sout is generated, it is possible to satisfactorily maintain the internal rhythm and the like of the user who visually recognizes the image corresponding to the display information Sout.
 また、画像情報Sinにおける青色成分に相当する輝度を主として制御して更新画像情報Sbc及び表示情報Soutを生成する場合には、上記体内リズム等に影響を与え易いとされ
る青色成分に相当する輝度を適切に制御して、当該体内リズム等を良好に維持させることができる。
Further, when the updated image information Sbc and the display information Sout are generated by mainly controlling the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image information Sin, the luminance corresponding to the blue component that is likely to affect the internal rhythm and the like. Can be appropriately controlled to maintain the internal rhythm and the like satisfactorily.
 更に、画像を視認するユーザの活動時間における青色成分に相当する輝度を、それ以外の時間における当該輝度よりも高くなるように制御する場合(図2乃至図7参照)には、活動時間とそれ以外の時間における体内リズムを良好に調整することができる。なおこの場合、そのユーザが例えば夜間勤務者である場合には、図2乃至図7に例示する制御態様を、それぞれの中心を通る図2乃至図7水平方向の軸を対称軸として図2乃至図7において上下逆とした制御態様により、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するのが好適である。 Further, when the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the activity time of the user viewing the image is controlled to be higher than the luminance at other times (see FIGS. 2 to 7), the activity time and It is possible to satisfactorily adjust the internal rhythm at other times. In this case, when the user is a night worker, for example, the control modes illustrated in FIGS. 2 to 7 are changed to the horizontal axis in FIGS. It is preferable to execute the control processing according to the first embodiment by the control mode upside down in FIG.
 更にまた、例えば図11乃至図15に例示するように、図1に例示する暦情報における日の出の時刻又は日の入りの時刻の少なくともいずれか一方に基づいて色成分の輝度を制御する場合には、画像を視認するユーザの一日の体内リズム等の変化に合わせた色成分の画像を表示させることで、より良好に当該体内リズム等を調整することができる。なお図11乃至図15に例示する場合についても、そのユーザが例えば夜間勤務者である場合には、図11乃至図15に例示する輝度の制御態様を、それぞれの横軸を対称軸として図11乃至図15において上下逆とした制御態様により、第1実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するのが好適である。 Furthermore, as illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 15, for example, when the luminance of the color component is controlled based on at least one of the sunrise time and the sunset time in the calendar information illustrated in FIG. By displaying an image of a color component in accordance with a change in the daily rhythm of the user who visually recognizes the rhythm, the internal rhythm can be adjusted more favorably. In the case illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 15 as well, when the user is a night worker, for example, the luminance control modes illustrated in FIGS. It is preferable to execute the control processing according to the first embodiment by the control mode upside down in FIG.
 また、例えば入力部9を用いてユーザが色成分の輝度の制御態様を入力する場合には、画像を視認する当該ユーザの好み等に合わせて輝度を制御でき、当該ユーザに適合させてその体内リズム等を調整することができる。更に図12乃至図14に例示するような、青色成分の強度の時間変化に相当するグラフを含むインターフェース画面SGをディスプレイ4に表示して当該強度の変更を行う場合は、画像を視認するユーザの好み等に合わせて簡易に輝度を制御でき、当該ユーザにより適合させてその体内リズム等を維持/調整することができる。 For example, when the user inputs the luminance control mode of the color component using the input unit 9, the luminance can be controlled according to the preference of the user who visually recognizes the image, and the body is adapted to the user. Rhythm etc. can be adjusted. Furthermore, when the interface screen SG including the graph corresponding to the temporal change of the intensity of the blue component as illustrated in FIGS. 12 to 14 is displayed on the display 4 and the intensity is changed, the user viewing the image The luminance can be easily controlled according to the preference and the like, and the internal rhythm and the like can be maintained / adjusted by the user.
 更にまた、位置データSposにより示されるディスプレイ4の位置に対応した暦情報及び時刻データStに基づいて色成分の輝度の制御を行うので、当該位置に適合させてより適切に体内リズム等を調整することができる。 Furthermore, since the luminance of the color component is controlled based on the calendar information corresponding to the position of the display 4 indicated by the position data Spos and the time data St, the internal rhythm and the like are adjusted more appropriately according to the position. be able to.
 (II)第2実施形態
 次に、本発明に係る他の実施形態である第2実施形態について、図16乃至図22を用いて説明する。なお、図16乃至図20は第2実施形態の原理等を説明する図であり、図21は第2実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図であり、図22は第2実施形態に係る制御処理を示すフローチャートである。また以下の説明では、第2実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の制御処理を、単に「第2実施形態に係る制御処理」と称する。
(II) Second Embodiment Next, a second embodiment, which is another embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 20 are diagrams for explaining the principle and the like of the second embodiment, FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 22 is a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing concerning. In the following description, the blue light intensity control process according to the second embodiment is simply referred to as “control process according to the second embodiment”.
 上記第1実施形態に係る制御処理において説明したように、当該制御処理は、上述したRGB色空間以外に、HLS色空間、HSV色空間、又は輝度(Y)を含むYCbCr色空間等に対しても同様に適用可能である。そこで以下に説明する第2実施形態では、RGB色空間からHLS色空間やHSV色空間のような色空間に変換し、R、G、Bの三原色だけではなく、シアン、マゼンタ及びイエロー等を考慮して、色空間毎に低減率又は増強率を制御して効率的なブルーライトの強度の制御を行い、RGB色空間に再変換してディスプレイに表示させるように構成する。より具体的に第2実施形態としては、本発明を上記HLS色空間又はHSV色空間を用いて実施する場合の実施形態を説明する。 As described in the control process according to the first embodiment, in addition to the RGB color space described above, the control process is performed on an HLS color space, an HSV color space, or a YCbCr color space including luminance (Y). Is equally applicable. Therefore, in the second embodiment described below, the RGB color space is converted to a color space such as an HLS color space or an HSV color space, and not only the three primary colors of R, G, and B but also cyan, magenta, and yellow are considered. Then, the reduction rate or the enhancement rate is controlled for each color space to efficiently control the intensity of the blue light, and the image is reconverted into the RGB color space and displayed on the display. More specifically, as a second embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is implemented using the above HLS color space or HSV color space will be described.
 (A)HLS色空間及びHSV色空間について
 初めに、第2実施形態に係るHLS色空間及びHSV色空間について、それぞれ図16を用いてその概念を説明する。なお、これらHLS色空間及びHSV色空間自体は、画像処理用としては、第1実施形態に係るRGB色空間と共に従来一般的に知られている色空間である。
(A) About the HLS color space and the HSV color space First, the concept of the HLS color space and the HSV color space according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the HLS color space and the HSV color space itself are color spaces that are generally known together with the RGB color space according to the first embodiment for image processing.
 先ず図16(a)にその概念を上下錐状に示すように、第2実施形態に係る低減処理に用いられるHLS色空間は、色相(Hue)軸H、輝度(Luminance)軸L及び彩度(Saturation)軸Sにより構成されている。 First, as shown in FIG. 16A in the form of an upper and lower cone, the HLS color space used for the reduction processing according to the second embodiment includes a hue (Hue) axis H, a luminance (Luminance) axis L, and saturation. (Saturation) The axis S is constituted.
 このうち色相軸Hは、いわゆる「色味」を0度から360度の範囲の角度で表す軸であり、図16(a)に例示するように、R(赤)成分、G(緑)成分及びB(青)成分の他に、C(Cyan(シアン))成分、M(Magenta(マゼンタ))成分及びY(Yellow(黄))成分が含まれている。このとき、例えば0度がR成分であり、色相軸H上でその反対側に位置する180度は、R成分の反対色に当たる青緑成分となる。このようなHLS色空間を用いれば、いわゆる反対色を求めるのも容易となる。また、HLS色空間における上記B成分の波長はRGB色空間における青色成分と同様に例えば440ナノメートル乃至490ナノメートル程度であり、上記R成分の波長はRGB色空間における赤色成分と同様に例えば620ナノメートル乃至740ナノメートル程度であり、上記G成分の波長はRGB色空間における緑色成分と同様に例えば500ナノメートル乃至600ナノメートル程度である。そして、上記C成分は上記G成分と上記B成分とからなる成分であり、上記M成分は上記R成分と上記B成分とからなる成分であり、上記Y成分は上記R成分と上記G成分とからなる成分である。 Of these, the hue axis H is an axis representing the so-called “color” with an angle in the range of 0 degrees to 360 degrees, and as illustrated in FIG. 16A, the R (red) component and the G (green) component. In addition to the B (blue) component, a C (Cyan) component, an M (Magenta) component, and a Y (Yellow) component are included. At this time, for example, 0 degree is the R component, and 180 degrees located on the opposite side on the hue axis H is a blue-green component corresponding to the opposite color of the R component. If such an HLS color space is used, it is easy to obtain a so-called opposite color. Further, the wavelength of the B component in the HLS color space is, for example, about 440 nanometers to 490 nanometers similarly to the blue component in the RGB color space, and the wavelength of the R component is, for example, 620 similarly to the red component in the RGB color space. The wavelength of the G component is, for example, about 500 to 600 nanometers, similar to the green component in the RGB color space. The C component is a component composed of the G component and the B component, the M component is a component composed of the R component and the B component, and the Y component is composed of the R component and the G component. It is the component which consists of.
 次に彩度軸Sは、輝度軸L(HLS色空間の中心軸)からの距離に見立てて、0%(中心軸自体)から100%(最外周)の範囲で「色の鮮やかさ」を表す軸であり、純色から彩度が落ちるということは、即ち灰色に近付いていくという考え方に基づいた概念である。 Next, the saturation axis S represents “color vividness” in a range from 0% (center axis itself) to 100% (outermost circumference), considering the distance from the luminance axis L (center axis of the HLS color space). It is an axis to express, and the fact that the saturation falls from the pure color is a concept based on the idea of approaching gray.
 最後に輝度軸Lは、「色の明るさ」を0%から100%の範囲で表す軸であり、輝度0%(図16(a)最下端)が「黒」であり、輝度100%(図16(a)最上端)が「白」であり、その中間(色相軸Hを表す円板の位置)が50%で純色を表している。 Finally, the luminance axis L is an axis representing “brightness of color” in a range of 0% to 100%, luminance 0% (the bottom end in FIG. 16A) is “black”, and luminance 100% ( In FIG. 16A, the uppermost end) is “white”, and the middle (the position of the disk representing the hue axis H) is 50%, representing a pure color.
 次に図16(b)にその概念を円柱状に示すように、第2実施形態に係る制御処理に用いられるHSV色空間は、色相(Hue)軸H、明度(又は輝度)(Value)軸V及び彩度(Saturation)軸Sにより構成されている。 Next, as shown in FIG. 16B in a cylindrical shape, the HSV color space used for the control processing according to the second embodiment includes a hue (Hue) axis H and a lightness (or luminance) (Value) axis. It is constituted by V and a saturation axis S.
 このうち色相軸Hは、上記HLS色空間の色相軸Hと基本的に同様の軸であり、色の種類を0度から360度の範囲の角度で表し、R成分、G成分及びB成分の他に、C成分、M成分及びY成分が含まれている。 Of these, the hue axis H is basically the same axis as the hue axis H of the HLS color space, and the color type is represented by an angle in the range of 0 to 360 degrees, and the R component, the G component, and the B component. In addition, a C component, an M component, and a Y component are included.
 次に彩度軸Sは、これも上記HLS色空間の彩度軸Sと同様に、明度軸V(HSV色空間の中心軸)からの距離に見立てて、0%(中心軸自体)から100%(最外周)の範囲で、「色の鮮やかさ」を表す軸である。 Next, similarly to the saturation axis S of the HLS color space, the saturation axis S is set to a distance from the lightness axis V (the central axis of the HSV color space) from 0% (the central axis itself) to 100. % (Outermost circumference) is the axis representing “color vividness”.
 最後に明度軸Vは、上記HLS色空間の輝度軸Lに類似して、「色の明るさ」を0%から100%の範囲で表す軸である。このとき当該明度軸Vが、明度100%の純色からどの程度明るさが失われるかを示すのに対し、上記HLS色空間の輝度軸Lは上述したように、「黒」が輝度0%であり、「白」が輝度100%であり、その中間の輝度50%が純色である点が異なる。この点、HLS色空間の輝度軸Lにおける50%以下がHSV色空間の明度軸Vに相当し、当該輝度軸Lにおける50%以上がHSV色空間の彩度軸Sに相当すると言える。 Finally, the lightness axis V is an axis representing “brightness of color” in the range of 0% to 100%, similar to the luminance axis L of the HLS color space. At this time, the brightness axis V indicates how much brightness is lost from a pure color with a brightness of 100%, whereas the brightness axis L of the HLS color space is “black” with 0% brightness as described above. There is a difference that “white” has a luminance of 100% and an intermediate luminance of 50% is a pure color. In this regard, it can be said that 50% or less of the luminance axis L in the HLS color space corresponds to the lightness axis V of the HSV color space, and 50% or more of the luminance axis L corresponds to the saturation axis S of the HSV color space.
 (B)第2実施形態の原理について
 次に、上記HLS色空間又はHSV色空間に適用される第2実施形態に係る制御処理の原理について、色空間別に図17乃至図20を用いて説明する。
(B) Principle of Second Embodiment Next, the principle of control processing according to the second embodiment applied to the HLS color space or HSV color space will be described for each color space with reference to FIGS. .
 先ず第2実施形態に係る制御処理として、HLS色空間において白色(無彩色)に対して第2実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の低減処理(以下第2実施形態において、単に「第2実施形態に係る低減処理」と称する)を施す場合、図17(a)に破線○及び実線○で例示するように、輝度軸L上において輝度を例えば破線○のレベルから実線○のレベルまで低減させることにより、ディスプレイによる表示上の色味を変化させることなく、ブルーライトの低減が可能である。一方、HLS色空間のB成分に対して第2実施形態に係る低減処理を施す場合、図17(b)に破線○及び実線○でそれぞれ例示するように、色相軸HにおけるB成分のみのレベルを低減することで、他の色成分(例えばC成分及びM成分)への影響を低減することにより全体的な表示上の色味の変化を抑制しつつ、ブルーライトの低減が可能である。 First, as the control process according to the second embodiment, the blue light intensity reduction process according to the second embodiment with respect to white (achromatic color) in the HLS color space (hereinafter referred to simply as “second embodiment” in the second embodiment). In the case of performing a reduction process according to FIG. 17 (a), the luminance is reduced from, for example, the level of the broken line ○ to the level of the solid line ○ on the luminance axis L, as illustrated by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. Thus, it is possible to reduce blue light without changing the color on the display. On the other hand, when the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HLS color space, the level of only the B component on the hue axis H is exemplified by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. By reducing the above, it is possible to reduce blue light while suppressing changes in the color on the entire display by reducing the influence on other color components (for example, the C component and the M component).
 これに対し、HSV色空間において白色(無彩色)に対して第2実施形態に係る低減処理を施す場合、図18(a)に破線○及び実線○で例示するように、HLS色空間の場合と同様に輝度軸L上において輝度を例えば破線○のレベルから実線○のレベルまで低減させることにより、ディスプレイによる表示上の色味を変化させることなく、ブルーライトの低減が可能である。また、HSV色空間のB成分に対して第2実施形態に係る低減処理を施す場合、図18(b)に破線○及び実線○でそれぞれ例示するように、これもHLS色空間の場合と同様に色相軸HにおけるB成分のみのレベルを低減することで、他の色成分への影響を低減することにより全体的な表示上の色味の変化を抑制しつつ、ブルーライトの低減が可能である。 On the other hand, when the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is performed on white (achromatic color) in the HSV color space, the case of the HLS color space as illustrated by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. Similarly to the above, by reducing the luminance on the luminance axis L from, for example, the level of the broken line ○ to the level of the solid line ○, it is possible to reduce blue light without changing the color on the display. Further, when the reduction processing according to the second embodiment is applied to the B component of the HSV color space, as illustrated by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. 18B, this is the same as in the case of the HLS color space. In addition, by reducing the level of only the B component on the hue axis H, it is possible to reduce blue light while suppressing changes in the overall color tone by reducing the effect on other color components. is there.
 次に第2実施形態に係る制御処理として、HLS色空間において白色(無彩色)に対して第2実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の増強処理(以下第2実施形態において、単に「第2実施形態に係る増強処理」と称する)を施す場合、図19(a)に破線○及び実線○で例示するように、輝度軸L上において輝度を例えば破線○のレベルから実線○のレベルまで増強させることにより、ディスプレイによる表示上の色味を変化させることなく、ブルーライトの増強が可能である。一方、HLS色空間のB成分に対して第2実施形態に係る増強処理を施す場合、図19(b)に破線○及び実線○でそれぞれ例示するように、色相軸HにおけるB成分のみのレベルを増強することで、他の色成分(例えばC成分及びM成分)への影響を低減することにより全体的な表示上の色味の変化を抑制しつつ、ブルーライトの増強が可能である。 Next, as a control process according to the second embodiment, the blue light intensity enhancement process according to the second embodiment with respect to white (achromatic color) in the HLS color space (hereinafter referred to simply as “second implementation” in the second embodiment). In the case of performing “enhancement processing according to form”), as exemplified by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. 19A, the luminance is increased on the luminance axis L from the level of the broken line ○ to the level of the solid line ○, for example. Thus, it is possible to enhance blue light without changing the color on the display. On the other hand, when the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HLS color space, the level of only the B component on the hue axis H is exemplified by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. As a result, the influence on other color components (for example, the C component and the M component) is reduced, thereby suppressing the change in color on the entire display and enhancing the blue light.
 これに対し、HSV色空間において白色(無彩色)に対して第2実施形態に係る増強処理を施す場合、図20(a)に破線○及び実線○で例示するように、HLS色空間の場合と同様に輝度軸L上において輝度を例えば破線○のレベルから実線○のレベルまで増強させることにより、ディスプレイによる表示上の色味を変化させることなく、ブルーライトの増強が可能である。また、HSV色空間のB成分に対して第2実施形態に係る増強処理を施す場合、図20(b)に破線○及び実線○でそれぞれ例示するように、これもHLS色空間の場合と同様に色相軸HにおけるB成分のみのレベルを増強することで、他の色成分への影響を低減することにより全体的な表示上の色味の変化を抑制しつつ、ブルーライトの増強が可能である。 On the other hand, when the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on white (achromatic) in the HSV color space, the case of the HLS color space, as illustrated by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. Similarly to the above, by increasing the luminance on the luminance axis L from, for example, the level of the broken line ◯ to the level of the solid line ◯, the blue light can be enhanced without changing the color on the display. Further, when the enhancement processing according to the second embodiment is performed on the B component of the HSV color space, as illustrated by the broken line ○ and the solid line ○ in FIG. 20B, this is the same as in the case of the HLS color space. In addition, by enhancing the level of only the B component on the hue axis H, it is possible to enhance the blue light while suppressing the change in color on the entire display by reducing the influence on other color components. is there.
 (C)第2実施形態に係る表示装置の構成及び動作等
 次に、上述した原理を用いる第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する第2実施形態に係る表示装置の構成及び動作等について、具体的に図21及び図22を用いて説明する。なお図21及び図22では、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1と同一の部材又は同一のステップについては、同一の部材番号又は同一のステップ番号を付して細部の説明は省略する。また以下の説明では、第2実施形態に係る制御処理の一例としてHLS色空間を用いた場合について説明する。
(C) Configuration and operation of the display device according to the second embodiment Next, the configuration and operation of the display device according to the second embodiment that executes the control process according to the second embodiment using the principle described above. This will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the same members or the same steps as those of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same member numbers or the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the following description, a case where the HLS color space is used as an example of the control process according to the second embodiment will be described.
 図21に示すように、第2実施形態に係る表示装置D2は、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1の場合と同様の構成及び機能を備える画像生成部1、制御部2、切換制御部3、ディスプレイ4、記録部5、切換部7、位置検出部8、入力部9及び時刻取得部10に加えて、第2実施形態に係る画素値更新部60と、第2実施形態に係る色空間変換部61と、第2実施形態に係る色空間逆変換部62と、により構成されている。なお記録部5については、それに記録されている制御率テーブルが、上記HLS色空間を用いた第2実施形態に係る制御処理のための予め設定された制御率テーブルであって、上記画像におけるB成分を低減又は増強する際に用いられる制御率パラメータを少なくとも含む制御率テーブルである点が、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1の記録部5とは異なっている。なおこの場合でも、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様に、上記特別な光学部品を別途使用することなく、表示装置D2としての色調整処理により、画像情報Sinに相当する画像におけるブルーライトを制御することに変わりはない。 As shown in FIG. 21, the display device D2 according to the second embodiment includes an image generation unit 1, a control unit 2, and a switching control unit 3 having the same configuration and functions as those of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment. In addition to the display 4, the recording unit 5, the switching unit 7, the position detection unit 8, the input unit 9, and the time acquisition unit 10, the pixel value update unit 60 according to the second embodiment and the color space according to the second embodiment The conversion unit 61 and the color space inverse conversion unit 62 according to the second embodiment are configured. For the recording unit 5, the control rate table recorded in the recording unit 5 is a preset control rate table for the control processing according to the second embodiment using the HLS color space, and It differs from the recording unit 5 of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment in that it is a control rate table including at least a control rate parameter used when reducing or enhancing components. Even in this case, similarly to the control processing according to the first embodiment, the blue light in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is removed by the color adjustment processing as the display device D2 without using the special optical component separately. There is no change to control.
 上記の構成を備える第2実施形態に係る表示装置D2において、画像生成部1から出力される上記画像情報Sinは、第1実施形態に係る表示装置D1の場合と同様にRGB色空間に対応した色データ等を含んでいる。そして制御部2は、入力部9からの上記操作信号Sop、位置検出部8からの上記位置データSpos及び時刻取得部10からの上記時刻データStに基づき、第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを示すオン/オフ信号、及び当該制御処理を実行する場合において当該制御処理に用いられる上記制御率テーブルを指定するためのテーブル指定信号をそれぞれ含む制御信号Scを生成する。この場合制御部2は、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様に、第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合においては、位置データSposにより示される位置、及び時刻データStにより示される時刻に基づき、その位置及び時刻に対応した制御率テーブル(HLS色空間用の制御率テーブル)を指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を生成する。その後制御部2は、上記オン/オフ信号を切換制御部3及び切換部7に、上記テーブル指定信号を上記記録部5に、それぞれ出力する。 In the display device D2 according to the second embodiment having the above configuration, the image information Sin output from the image generation unit 1 corresponds to the RGB color space as in the case of the display device D1 according to the first embodiment. Includes color data and the like. Then, the control unit 2 executes the control process according to the second embodiment based on the operation signal Sop from the input unit 9, the position data Spos from the position detection unit 8, and the time data St from the time acquisition unit 10. And a control signal Sc each including an on / off signal indicating whether to perform the control process and a table designating signal for designating the control rate table used in the control process when the control process is performed. In this case, similarly to the control process according to the first embodiment, the control unit 2 executes the control process according to the second embodiment, the position indicated by the position data Spos, and the time indicated by the time data St. The table designation signal for designating a control rate table (control rate table for HLS color space) corresponding to the position and time is generated based on the above. Thereafter, the control unit 2 outputs the on / off signal to the switching control unit 3 and the switching unit 7, and outputs the table designation signal to the recording unit 5.
 これにより切換制御部3は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、画像情報Sinについて第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行するか否かを判定し、実行する場合は画像情報Sinを色空間変換部61に出力する。一方当該制御処理を実行しない場合、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinをそのまま切換部7に出力する。 Thereby, the switching control unit 3 determines whether or not to execute the control process according to the second embodiment for the image information Sin based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2, and if so, the image information Sin. Is output to the color space conversion unit 61. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed, the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the switching unit 7 as it is.
 そして色空間変換部61は、切換制御部3から出力された画像情報Sinが対応する色空間をRGB色空間からHLS色空間に変換し、変換後のHLS色空間に対応する画像情報Sinを画素値更新部60に出力する。なお、色空間変換部60における色空間の変換処理(RGB色空間からHLS色空間への変換処理)自体は従来の当該変換処理と同一であるので、細部の説明は省略する。 The color space conversion unit 61 converts the color space corresponding to the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3 from the RGB color space to the HLS color space, and converts the image information Sin corresponding to the converted HLS color space to the pixel. Output to the value update unit 60. Note that the color space conversion processing (conversion processing from the RGB color space to the HLS color space) itself in the color space conversion unit 60 is the same as the conventional conversion processing, and thus detailed description is omitted.
 他方記録部5からは、制御部2からのテーブル指定信号により指定されている低減率テーブルに含まれる低減率パラメータが画素値更新部60に出力される。 On the other hand, from the recording unit 5, the reduction rate parameter included in the reduction rate table designated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 is output to the pixel value update unit 60.
 これらにより画素値更新部60は、色空間変換部61から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における、HLS色空間の少なくともB成分の画素値(より具体的には、例えば輝度)を、記録部5から出力された低減率テーブルにより示される画素値に更新し、更新画像情報Sbcとして色空間逆変換部62に出力する。この場合の画素値の更新は、図17又は図19で例示した原理に基づく画素値の更新である。 As a result, the pixel value update unit 60 has at least the B component pixel value of the HLS color space (more specifically, for example, luminance) in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the color space conversion unit 61. ) Is updated to the pixel value indicated by the reduction rate table output from the recording unit 5 and output to the color space inverse conversion unit 62 as updated image information Sbc. The update of the pixel value in this case is an update of the pixel value based on the principle illustrated in FIG. 17 or FIG.
 そして色空間逆変換部62は、画素値更新部60から出力された更新画像情報Sbcが対応する色空間をHLS色空間から元のRGB色空間に逆変換し、逆変換後のRGB色空間に対応する更新画像情報Sbcを切換部7に出力する。なお、色空間逆変換部62における色空間の逆変換処理(HLS色空間からRGB色空間への逆変換処理)自体は従来の当該逆変換処理と同一であるので、細部の説明は省略する。 Then, the color space reverse conversion unit 62 reversely converts the color space corresponding to the updated image information Sbc output from the pixel value update unit 60 from the HLS color space to the original RGB color space, and converts the color space to the RGB color space after the reverse conversion. The corresponding updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7. Note that the color space reverse conversion process (inverse conversion process from the HLS color space to the RGB color space) itself in the color space reverse conversion unit 62 is the same as the conventional reverse conversion process, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.
 そして切換部7は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号に基づき、第2実施形態に係る制御処理を行わない場合には、切換制御部3からの画像情報Sinをそのまま表示情報Soutとしてディスプレイ4に出力する。これに対して第2実施形態に係る制御処理を行う場合には、色空間逆変換部62からの上記更新画像情報Sbcを表示情報Soutとしてディスプレイ4に出力する。 Then, the switching unit 7 displays the image information Sin from the switching control unit 3 as display information Sout as it is when the control processing according to the second embodiment is not performed based on the on / off signal from the control unit 2. 4 is output. On the other hand, when the control processing according to the second embodiment is performed, the updated image information Sbc from the color space inverse transform unit 62 is output to the display 4 as display information Sout.
 最後にディスプレイ4は、切換部7から出力されてきた表示情報Soutに相当する画像を表示する。 Finally, the display 4 displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout output from the switching unit 7.
 次に、第2実施形態に係る制御処理について、より具体的に図22を用いて説明する。 Next, the control process according to the second embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIG.
 図22に示すように、第2実施形態に係る制御処理においては初めに、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様のステップS1乃至ステップS3が実行される。ステップS3の判定において第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合(ステップS3;YES)、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinを色空間変換部61に出力する。一方、ステップS3の判定において当該制御処理を実行しない場合(ステップS3;NO)、切換制御部3は画像情報Sinをそのまま切換部7に出力する(ステップS6)。 As shown in FIG. 22, in the control process according to the second embodiment, first, the same steps S1 to S3 as the control process according to the first embodiment are executed. When the control process according to the second embodiment is executed in the determination in step S3 (step S3; YES), the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin to the color space conversion unit 61. On the other hand, when the control process is not executed in the determination in step S3 (step S3; NO), the switching control unit 3 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the switching unit 7 (step S6).
 次に色空間変換部61は、切換制御部3から出力された画像情報Sinに対して、上述したRGB色空間からHLS色空間への変換処理を施し、色空間がHLS色空間に変換された画像情報Sinを画素値更新部60に出力する(ステップS10)。 Next, the color space conversion unit 61 performs the conversion process from the RGB color space to the HLS color space described above on the image information Sin output from the switching control unit 3, and the color space is converted into the HLS color space. The image information Sin is output to the pixel value update unit 60 (step S10).
 これらと並行して記録部5では、制御部2からの上記テーブル指定信号により示されている制御率テーブルの選定(換言すれば、低減率又は増強率の指定)が行われ(ステップS11)、テーブル指定信号により指定された制御率テーブルに含まれる制御率パラメータが画素値更新部60に出力される。 In parallel to these, the recording unit 5 selects a control rate table (in other words, specifies a reduction rate or an enhancement rate) indicated by the table designation signal from the control unit 2 (step S11). The control rate parameter included in the control rate table specified by the table specifying signal is output to the pixel value update unit 60.
 これらにより画素値更新部60は、色空間変換部61から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における色相軸Hの少なくともB成分の画素値を、記録部5から出力された制御率テーブルにより示される画素値に更新し(ステップS12)、更新画像情報Sbcとして色空間逆変換部62に出力する。 Accordingly, the pixel value update unit 60 controls the pixel value of at least the B component of the hue axis H in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the color space conversion unit 61, which is output from the recording unit 5. The pixel value indicated by the rate table is updated (step S12), and the updated image information Sbc is output to the color space inverse transform unit 62.
 そして色空間逆変換部62は、画素値更新部60から出力された更新画像情報Sbcに対して、上述したHLS色空間からRGB色空間への逆変換処理を施し、色空間がRGB色空間に戻された更新画像情報Sbcを切換部7に出力する(ステップS13)。 Then, the color space inverse conversion unit 62 performs the above-described reverse conversion processing from the HLS color space to the RGB color space on the updated image information Sbc output from the pixel value update unit 60, and the color space is changed to the RGB color space. The returned updated image information Sbc is output to the switching unit 7 (step S13).
 その後切換部7は、制御部2からの上記オン/オフ信号及び上記範囲指定信号に基づき、切換制御部3側と色空間逆変換部62側とを切り換えて、表示情報Soutをディスプレイ4に出力して表示させる(ステップS6)。 Thereafter, the switching unit 7 switches between the switching control unit 3 side and the color space inverse conversion unit 62 side based on the on / off signal and the range designation signal from the control unit 2 and outputs the display information Sout to the display 4. Is displayed (step S6).
 以上説明したように、第2実施形態に係る制御処理によれば、HLS色空間におけるB成分に相当する輝度の制御率が、色相軸H内のB成分以外の色成分それぞれに相当する各輝度の制御率以上となるように、当該B成分に相当する輝度を制御して更新画像情報Sbcを生成して表示させる。よって、当該B成分を低減する光学部材等を別途使用することなく、B成分を制御(低減又は増強)することができる。 As described above, according to the control processing according to the second embodiment, the luminance control rate corresponding to the B component in the HLS color space corresponds to each luminance component corresponding to each color component other than the B component in the hue axis H. The updated image information Sbc is generated and displayed by controlling the luminance corresponding to the B component so as to be equal to or greater than the control rate. Therefore, the B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) without separately using an optical member or the like that reduces the B component.
 また図17(a)に例示するように、画像情報Sinに相当する画像が無彩色である場合には、輝度軸L上でのみ(換言すれば彩度軸S上の彩度をゼロとして)輝度を制御して更新画像情報Sbcを生成すれば、無彩色である例えば白色の画像に対しても、眼の保護を有効に行うことができる。更に、画像情報Sinに相当する画像における彩度が例えば10%以下である場合でも、色相内のB成分及び色相内の当該B成分以外の色成分それぞれに相当する各輝度の制御率を全て略同一として更新画像情報Sbcを生成すれば、色相内の全ての色成分が略等しく制御されることで、例えば表示上の白色の色味が変化することを防止しつつB成分が制御でき、B成分を色味の変化なく制御(低減又は増強)することができる。 Further, as illustrated in FIG. 17A, when the image corresponding to the image information Sin is achromatic, it is only on the luminance axis L (in other words, the saturation on the saturation axis S is set to zero). If the updated image information Sbc is generated by controlling the luminance, it is possible to effectively protect the eyes even for an achromatic color such as a white image. Furthermore, even when the saturation in the image corresponding to the image information Sin is, for example, 10% or less, the control ratios of the luminances corresponding to the B component in the hue and the color components other than the B component in the hue are all omitted. If the updated image information Sbc is generated as the same, all the color components in the hue are controlled to be approximately equal, so that, for example, the B component can be controlled while preventing the white color on the display from changing. Ingredients can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) without changes in color.
 更にまた図17(b)に例示するように、色相内のB成分に相当する輝度のみを制御して表示用画像情報を生成する場合には、表示上の白色を含む色の色味が変化することを防止しつつ、B成分を制御(低減又は増強)することができる。 Furthermore, as illustrated in FIG. 17B, when display image information is generated by controlling only the luminance corresponding to the B component in the hue, the color tone of the color including white on the display changes. The B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) while preventing this.
 なお、上述した第2実施形態に係る制御処理は、色空間としてHLS色空間を用いる場合について説明したが、図16(b)、図18及び図20を用いて説明したHSV色空間を用いる場合でも、全く同様に第2実施形態に係る制御処理を実行することができる。この場合、上記色空間変換部61では、画像情報SinについてRGB色空間からHSV色空間への変換処理を行い、また色空間逆変換部62では、更新画像情報SbcについてHSV色空間からRGB色空間への逆変換処理を行うことになる。またこの場合の画素値の更新は、図18又は図20で例示した原理に基づく画素値の更新である。なお、色空間変換部61におけるRGB色空間からHSV色空間への変換処理自体、及び色空間逆変換部62におけるHSV色空間からRGB色空間への逆変換処理自体は、それぞれ従来の当該変換処理及び当該逆変換処理と同一である。このように第2実施形態に係る制御処理では、画像情報Sinの色空間をHLS色空間又はHSV色空間のいずれか一方に変換して当該制御処理を実行するので、白色を含む色の表示上の色味が変化することを防止しつつ、B成分を制御(低減又は増強)することができる。また、同様の色空間であるいわゆるLa*b*色空間、及び輝度と色差から成るいわゆるYCbCr(YUV)色空間についても、第2実施形態は同様に適用可能である。 In the control processing according to the second embodiment described above, the case where the HLS color space is used as the color space has been described. However, the case where the HSV color space described with reference to FIGS. 16B, 18, and 20 is used. However, the control process according to the second embodiment can be executed in exactly the same manner. In this case, the color space conversion unit 61 converts the image information Sin from the RGB color space to the HSV color space, and the color space inverse conversion unit 62 converts the update image information Sbc from the HSV color space to the RGB color space. Inverse conversion processing is performed. In this case, the pixel value is updated based on the principle illustrated in FIG. 18 or FIG. Note that the conversion process itself from the RGB color space to the HSV color space in the color space conversion unit 61 and the reverse conversion process from the HSV color space to the RGB color space in the color space inverse conversion unit 62 are the conventional conversion processes. And the same inverse transformation process. As described above, in the control processing according to the second embodiment, the color space of the image information Sin is converted into either the HLS color space or the HSV color space, and the control processing is executed. The B component can be controlled (reduced or enhanced) while preventing the color of the material from changing. The second embodiment can also be applied to a so-called La * b * color space, which is a similar color space, and a so-called YCbCr (YUV) color space consisting of luminance and color difference.
 更に、記録部5に記録されている制御率テーブルのうち制御部2の操作により選択された制御率テーブルを用いて制御処理を行う点については、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様の効果を奏し得ると共に、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様の応用が可能である。 Further, the same effect as the control processing according to the first embodiment is achieved in that the control processing is performed using the control rate table selected by the operation of the control unit 2 among the control rate tables recorded in the recording unit 5. The same application as the control processing according to the first embodiment is possible.
 なお、本発明については、上述した第1実施形態及び第2実施形態の他に、種々の態様が可能である。 In addition to the first and second embodiments described above, various aspects are possible for the present invention.
 例えば、第1実施形態及び第2実施形態に係るディスプレイ4としては、パーソナルコンピュータ用等の設置型のディスプレイの他に、例えば車両又は自転車等の移動案内に用いられる車載型のディスプレイに本発明を適用することも可能である。この場合、青色成分の増強処理により運転者の眠気防止を図ると言った用い方も可能であり、この場合は時刻と共に運転中であるか否か(例えば、車載型のディスプレイとして稼働中であるか否か)に基づいて青色成分の増強処理を実行するように構成することが考えられる。 For example, as the display 4 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the present invention is applied to an in-vehicle display used for movement guidance of, for example, a vehicle or a bicycle in addition to a stationary display for a personal computer or the like. It is also possible to apply. In this case, it can be used to prevent the driver's sleepiness by enhancing the blue component. In this case, whether or not the vehicle is in operation with time (for example, it is operating as an in-vehicle display) It is conceivable to perform the blue component enhancement processing based on whether or not.
 また例えば、第1実施形態に係る制御処理及び第2実施形態に係る制御処理を、日単位ではなく、月単位、或いは季節単位で実行するように構成することも可能である。この場合の制御率テーブルとしては、月ごと、又は季節ごとの制御率テーブルが記録部5に記録されて用いられることになる。 Further, for example, the control process according to the first embodiment and the control process according to the second embodiment can be configured to be executed not in units of days but in units of months or seasons. As a control rate table in this case, a monthly or seasonal control rate table is recorded in the recording unit 5 and used.
 更に上述した第1実施形態及び第2実施形態では、画像全体に対して一律に各実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合について説明したが、これ以外に例えば、画像内の範囲を指定して各実施形態に係る制御処理の対象とする/しないを制御するように構成することもできる。 Furthermore, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the case where the control processing according to each embodiment is uniformly executed on the entire image has been described. However, other than this, for example, a range in the image is designated. It can also be configured to control whether or not to be the target of the control processing according to each embodiment.
 (III)第3実施形態
 最後に、本発明に係る更に他の実施形態である第3実施形態について、図23乃至図26を用いて説明する。
(III) Third Embodiment Finally, a third embodiment, which is still another embodiment according to the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS.
 (A)第3実施形態の原理
 初めに、第3実施形態について具体的に説明する前に、第3実施形態の原理について簡潔に説明する。
(A) Principle of the Third Embodiment First, before specifically describing the third embodiment, the principle of the third embodiment will be briefly described.
 上記第1実施形態に係る制御処理においては上述したように、日又は時刻に応じてブルーライトの強度を制御する構成としたが、以下に説明する第3実施形態では、上記液晶ディスプレイ等からなるディスプレイを視認するユーザの年齢及び性別を示すデータを取得し、そのデータに基づいて、当該ディスプレイを用いた表示におけるコントラストの補正、色の補正及び上記ブルーライトの強度の制御をそれぞれ行う。なお以下の説明において、上記年齢及び性別を単に「年齢等」と称する。このときのブルーライトの強度の制御では、当該ユーザの年齢等に合わせて、必要に応じて当該画像におけるブルーライトの強度を低減する。以上のように当該ユーザの年齢等に合わせて表示のコントラスト等を最適化することで、当該年齢等に適合した視認し易い状態で、且つ必要に応じて当該ユーザの眼をブルーライトから保護しつつ、必要な画像を表示させる。 As described above, in the control process according to the first embodiment, the intensity of the blue light is controlled according to the day or time. However, in the third embodiment described below, the liquid crystal display or the like is used. Data indicating the age and sex of the user viewing the display is acquired, and based on the data, contrast correction, color correction, and blue light intensity control are performed in the display using the display. In the following description, the age and sex are simply referred to as “age etc.”. In the control of the intensity of the blue light at this time, the intensity of the blue light in the image is reduced as necessary in accordance with the age of the user. As described above, by optimizing the display contrast and the like according to the age of the user, the user's eyes are protected from blue light in an easy-to-view state suitable for the age and so on. While displaying the necessary image.
 (B)第3実施形態
 次に、上述した原理に基づく本発明に係る第3実施形態について、図23乃至図26を用いて説明する。なお、以下に説明する第3実施形態は、液晶ディスプレイからなるディスプレイを備えて動画及び静止画を含む画像を表示する表示装置における表示状態(即ち、当該画像におけるコントラスト、色及びブルーライトの輝度等)の制御処理に対して、本発明を適用した場合の実施の形態である。また以下の説明において、第3実施形態に係る表示状態の制御処理を、単に「第3実施形態に係る制御処理」と称する。
(B) Third Embodiment Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention based on the above-described principle will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described below, a display state in a display device that includes a display including a liquid crystal display and displays images including moving images and still images (that is, contrast in the image, color, luminance of blue light, etc.) This is an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the control process of FIG. In the following description, the display state control process according to the third embodiment is simply referred to as a “control process according to the third embodiment”.
 更に、図23は第3実施形態に係る表示装置の概要構成を示すブロック図であり、図24は第3実施形態に係るコントラストの補正処理を示す図であり、図25は第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの強度の時刻に対応した制御処理を示す図であり、図26は第3実施形態に係る制御処理を示すフローチャートである。 Further, FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device according to the third embodiment, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a contrast correction process according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a diagram according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the control process corresponding to the time of the intensity | strength of the blue light which concerns, and FIG. 26 is a flowchart which shows the control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.
 図23に示すように、第3実施形態に係る表示装置D3は、画像生成部20と、CPU、ROM及びRAM等により構成される制御部21と、コントラスト補正判定部22と、上記ブルーライトを発生(発光)するLEDであるバックライトを有する液晶ディスプレイ等からなるディスプレイ23と、ハードディスク等の記録媒体により構成され、後述する輝度テーブル等を不揮発性に記録する記録部24と、コントラスト補正画素値更新部25と、色補正判定部26と、ディスプレイ23を視認するユーザの年齢等を示す年齢データSageを取得する年齢データ取得部27と、色補正画素値更新部28と、現在時刻を示す時刻データStを取得する時刻取得部29と、ブルーライト制御判定部30と、ブルーライト制御画素値更新部31と、により構成されている。 As shown in FIG. 23, the display device D3 according to the third embodiment includes an image generation unit 20, a control unit 21 including a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, a contrast correction determination unit 22, and the blue light. A display 23 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like having a backlight which is a generated (light emitting) LED, a recording unit 24 configured to record a luminance table or the like described later in a nonvolatile manner, and a contrast correction pixel value. An update unit 25, a color correction determination unit 26, an age data acquisition unit 27 that acquires age data Sage indicating the age of the user who visually recognizes the display 23, a color correction pixel value update unit 28, and a time that indicates the current time A time acquisition unit 29 for acquiring data St, a blue light control determination unit 30, a blue light control pixel value update unit 31, and It is comprised by.
 このとき、年齢データ取得部27が本発明に係る「年齢対応情報取得手段」の一例に相当し、ブルーライト制御画素値更新部31が本発明に係る「処理手段」の一例に相当する。 At this time, the age data acquisition unit 27 corresponds to an example of “age-related information acquisition unit” according to the present invention, and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 corresponds to an example of “processing unit” according to the present invention.
 この構成において画像生成部20は、ディスプレイ23に表示されるべき画像(静止画又は動画の少なくともいずれか一方を含む。以下同様。)に相当する画像情報Sinを生成してコントラスト補正判定部22に出力する。一方記録部24は、第3実施形態に係る制御処理のための予め設定された各種テーブルを不揮発性に複数記録している。 In this configuration, the image generation unit 20 generates image information Sin corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display 23 (including at least one of a still image and a moving image; the same applies hereinafter) and supplies the image information to the contrast correction determination unit 22. Output. On the other hand, the recording unit 24 records a plurality of preset various tables for control processing according to the third embodiment in a nonvolatile manner.
 ここで、第3実施形態に係る上記既定の各種テーブルとして具体的には、上記コントラストの補正に用いられる強度補正テーブルと、上記色の補正に用いられる色補正テーブルと、上記ブルーライトの制御に用いられる輝度テーブルと、が、それぞれ不揮発性に記録部24に記録されている。例えば図23に例示する表示装置D3の場合、上記強度補正テーブルとしての第1強度補正テーブルTC1乃至第n強度補正テーブルTCnと、上記色補正テーブルとしての第1色補正テーブルTL1乃至第m色補正テーブルTLm(mは自然数)と、上記輝度テーブルとしての第1輝度テーブルTB1乃至第p輝度テーブルTBp(pは自然数)と、が、それぞれ不揮発性に記録されている。これら各種テーブルについては、後ほど詳述する。なお以下の説明において、上記第1強度補正テーブルTC1乃至第n強度補正テーブルTCnに共通な事項を説明する場合、これらを纏めて単に「強度補正テーブルTC」と称する。また上記第1色補正テーブルTL1乃至第n色補正テーブルTLmに共通な事項を説明する場合、これらを纏めて単に「色補正テーブルTL」と称する。更に、上記第1輝度テーブルTB1乃至第p輝度テーブルTBpに共通な事項を説明する場合、これらを纏めて単に「輝度テーブルTB」と称する。 Here, as the predetermined various tables according to the third embodiment, specifically, the intensity correction table used for the contrast correction, the color correction table used for the color correction, and the blue light control. The luminance table used is recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner. For example, in the case of the display device D3 illustrated in FIG. 23, the first intensity correction table TC1 to the nth intensity correction table TCn as the intensity correction table and the first color correction table TL1 to the mth color correction as the color correction table. A table TLm (m is a natural number) and a first luminance table TB1 to a p-th luminance table TBp (p is a natural number) as the luminance table are recorded in a nonvolatile manner. These various tables will be described in detail later. In the following description, when the matters common to the first intensity correction table TC1 to the nth intensity correction table TCn are described, these are simply referred to as “intensity correction table TC”. Further, when the matters common to the first color correction table TL1 to the nth color correction table TLm are described, these are collectively referred to simply as “color correction table TL”. Furthermore, when the matters common to the first luminance table TB1 to the p-th luminance table TBp are described, these are collectively referred to as “luminance table TB”.
 一方年齢データ取得部27は、上記年齢データSageを取得して制御部21に出力する。このとき年齢データ取得部27は、例えば図示しない入力部を上記ユーザが操作することにより入力された上記年齢データSageを当該入力部から取得してもよい。或いは年齢データ取得部27は、例えば上記ユーザが受診している病院のカルテに相当するカルテデータを当該病院から例えばインターネット等のネットワークを介して取得し、そのカルテデータから上記年齢データSageを抽出して制御部21に出力してもよい。更に年齢デー
タ取得部27は、例えば特開2009-301323号公報に記載されているような従来と同様の顔認識技術を用いてユーザの年齢等を推定/検出し、当該検出された年齢等を示す上記年齢データSageを抽出して制御部21に出力してもよい。他方時刻取得部29は、例えば図示しないタイマから上記時刻データStを取得し、制御部21に出力する。
On the other hand, the age data acquisition unit 27 acquires the age data Sage and outputs it to the control unit 21. At this time, the age data acquisition unit 27 may acquire, for example, the age data Sage input by the user operating an input unit (not shown) from the input unit. Alternatively, the age data acquisition unit 27 acquires, for example, medical chart data corresponding to the medical chart of the hospital where the user is consulted from the hospital via a network such as the Internet, and extracts the age data Sage from the medical chart data. May be output to the control unit 21. Further, the age data acquisition unit 27 estimates / detects the user's age and the like using a face recognition technique similar to the conventional one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-301323, and determines the detected age and the like. The age data Sage shown may be extracted and output to the control unit 21. On the other hand, the time acquisition unit 29 acquires the time data St from a timer (not shown), for example, and outputs it to the control unit 21.
 これらにより制御部21は、上記年齢データSage及び時刻データStに基づき、ディスプレイ23に表示すべき画像において上記第3実施形態に係る各制御処理の対象とする部分を示す等の役割を担うオン/オフ信号、及び当該制御処理を実行する場合において当該制御処理に用いられる上記各種テーブルを指定するためのテーブル指定信号等を含む制御信号Scを生成する。この場合に制御部21は、上記表示すべき画像において上記第3実施形態に係る各制御処理の対象とする部分に相当する画像情報Sinの画素値が画像生成部20から入力されるタイミングにおいては、オン信号である上記オン/オフ信号を含む制御信号Scを生成する。これに対し制御部21は、上記第3実施形態に係る各制御処理の対象としない部分に相当する画像情報Sinの画素値が画像生成部20から入力されるタイミングにおいては、オフ信号である上記オン/オフ信号を含む制御信号Scを生成する。なお、ディスプレイ23に表示する画像を第3実施形態に係る制御処理の対象とするか否かについては、第1実施形態に係る制御処理と同様に、例えば当該画像が映画に相当する画像である場合は第3実施形態に係る制御処理の対象とせず、一方当該画像が事務用の文書に相当する画像である場合は当該制御処理の対象とするのが好ましい。 Based on these, the control unit 21 plays an role such as indicating a portion to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment in an image to be displayed on the display 23 based on the age data Sage and the time data St. A control signal Sc including an off signal and a table designating signal for designating the various tables used for the control processing when the control processing is executed is generated. In this case, at the timing when the pixel value of the image information Sin corresponding to the portion to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment is input from the image generation unit 20 in the image to be displayed, the control unit 21 Then, the control signal Sc including the on / off signal which is an on signal is generated. On the other hand, the control unit 21 is an off signal at the timing when the pixel value of the image information Sin corresponding to the portion not to be subjected to each control process according to the third embodiment is input from the image generation unit 20. A control signal Sc including an on / off signal is generated. Whether or not the image displayed on the display 23 is the target of the control process according to the third embodiment is, for example, the image corresponding to a movie, as in the control process according to the first embodiment. In such a case, the control process according to the third embodiment is not a target of the control process. On the other hand, when the image is an image corresponding to an office document, the control process is preferably performed.
 また制御部21は、第3実施形態に係る制御処理を実行する場合においては、年齢データSageにより示される年齢等、及び時刻データStにより示される時刻に基づき、強度補正テーブルTC、色補正テーブルTL及び輝度テーブルTBを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を生成する。その後制御部21は、上記コントラストの補正の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を制御信号Scとしてコントラスト補正判定部22に出力し、上記色の補正の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を制御信号Scとして色補正判定部26に出力し、上記ブルーライトの制御の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を制御信号Scとしてブルーライト制御判定部30に出力し、更に上記テーブル指定信号を制御信号Scとして上記記録部24に出力する。 Further, when executing the control processing according to the third embodiment, the control unit 21 performs the intensity correction table TC and the color correction table TL based on the age indicated by the age data Sage and the time indicated by the time data St. And the table designation signal for designating the luminance table TB is generated. Thereafter, the control unit 21 outputs the on / off signal indicating the portion of the image to be corrected for contrast to the contrast correction determination unit 22 as a control signal Sc, and selects the portion of the image to be corrected for color. The on / off signal shown is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as a control signal Sc, and the blue light control determination unit 30 uses the on / off signal indicating the part of the image to be controlled by the blue light as the control signal Sc. Further, the table designation signal is outputted as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24.
 なお以下の第3実施形態の説明において、上記コントラストの補正の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を単に「コントラスト補正オン/オフ信号」と称し、上記色の補正の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を単に「色補正オン/オフ信号」と称し、上記ブルーライトの制御の対象とする画像の部分を示す上記オン/オフ信号を単に「ブルーライト制御オン/オフ信号」と称する。また、強度補正テーブルTCを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を単に「強度補正テーブル指定信号」と称し、上記色補正テーブルTLを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を単に「色補正テーブル指定信号」と称し、上記輝度テーブルTBを指定するための上記テーブル指定信号を単に「輝度テーブル指定信号」と称する。 In the following description of the third embodiment, the on / off signal indicating the portion of the image to be subjected to contrast correction is simply referred to as “contrast correction on / off signal” and is to be subjected to color correction. The on / off signal indicating the image portion is simply referred to as “color correction on / off signal”, and the on / off signal indicating the image portion to be controlled by the blue light is simply referred to as “blue light control on / off”. This is referred to as an “off signal”. Further, the table designation signal for designating the intensity correction table TC is simply referred to as “intensity correction table designation signal”, and the table designation signal for designating the color correction table TL is simply “color correction table designation signal”. The table designation signal for designating the luminance table TB is simply referred to as “luminance table designation signal”.
 上記制御部21の動作によりコントラスト補正判定部22は、当該制御部21からの上記コントラスト補正オン/オフ信号に基づき、上記画像のうち上記コントラストの補正の対象とする部分に相当する画像情報Sinの画素については、その画素値をコントラスト補正画素値更新部25に出力する。一方、上記画像のうち上記コントラストの補正の対象とする部分以外の部分に相当する画像情報Sinの画素については、その画素値をそのまま色補正判定部26に出力する。 Based on the contrast correction on / off signal from the control unit 21, the contrast correction determination unit 22 performs the operation of the control unit 21 on the image information Sin corresponding to the portion of the image that is the target of the contrast correction. For the pixel, the pixel value is output to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25. On the other hand, the pixel value of the pixel of the image information Sin corresponding to a portion other than the contrast correction target portion of the image is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as it is.
 次に記録部24は、制御部21からの上記強度補正テーブル指定信号により指定されている強度補正テーブルTCに含まれる強度補正パラメータを、コントラスト補正画素値更新部25に出力する。 Next, the recording unit 24 outputs the intensity correction parameters included in the intensity correction table TC specified by the intensity correction table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25.
 これらによりコントラスト補正画素値更新部25は、コントラスト補正判定部22から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における例えば赤色成分、青色成分及び緑色成分それぞれの画素値(より具体的には、例えば輝度値)を、記録部24から出力された上記強度補正パラメータに対応した画素値に更新し、そのコントラストが当該強度補正パラメータに基づいて補正されたコントラスト補正画像情報Sccとして色補正判定部26に出力する。このとき、上記画素値(又は輝度値)の上限値は階調数によって決定され、ディスプレイ23がRGB色空間を用いた24ビットの液晶ディスプレイであれば、その上限値は三色の色成分ごとに「255(2-1)」である。またディスプレイ23がRGB色空間を用いた18ビットの液晶ディスプレイであれば、その上限値は三色の色成分ごとに「63(2-1)」である。また以下の説明において、上記赤色成分、青色成分及び緑色成分に共通の事項を説明する場合、単に「各色成分」と称する。 Accordingly, the contrast correction pixel value updating unit 25, for example, the pixel values of the red component, the blue component, and the green component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the contrast correction determination unit 22 (more specifically, Is updated to the pixel value corresponding to the intensity correction parameter output from the recording unit 24, and the color correction determination is performed as contrast corrected image information Scc in which the contrast is corrected based on the intensity correction parameter. To the unit 26. At this time, the upper limit value of the pixel value (or luminance value) is determined by the number of gradations, and if the display 23 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space, the upper limit value is set for each of the three color components. “255 (2 8 −1)”. If the display 23 is an 18-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space, the upper limit value is “63 (2 6 −1)” for each of the three color components. In the following description, when the matters common to the red component, the blue component, and the green component are described, they are simply referred to as “each color component”.
 次に上記強度補正テーブルTCについて、具体的に図24を用いて説明する。上述したように制御部21は、ディスプレイ23に表示される画像のうち上記コントラストの補正の対象とする部分に相当する画像情報Sinの画素について、当該コントラストの補正に用いられる強度補正テーブルTCを指定する上記強度補正テーブル指定信号を記録部24に出力する。このとき、第3実施形態に係る強度補正テーブルTCとしては、例えば、コントラストの補正強度「弱」に相当する第1強度補正テーブルTC1と、当該補正強度「中」に相当する第2補正強度テーブルTC2と、当該補正強度「強」に相当する第3強度補正テーブルと、が予め設定され、それぞれの補正強度テーブルTCに相当する強度補正パラメータが記録部24に不揮発性に記録されている。この場合、上記nが「3」であることになる。そして、ディスプレイ23がRGB色空間を用いた24ビットの液晶ディスプレイであり、且つコントラストの補正をしない場合の各色における入力画素値と出力画素値との関係が図24(a)に例示する関係であるとすると、補正強度「弱」に相当する上記第1補正強度テーブルTC1としては、例えば図24(b)に例示するような態様(図24(a)に例示する場合との相違は図24(b)中破線矢印参照)でコントラストを補正するための当該第1補正強度テーブルTC1が記録されている。また同様に、補正強度「中」に相当する上記第2補正強度テーブルTC2としては、例えば図24(c)に例示するような態様(図24(b)に例示する場合との相違は図24(c)中破線矢印参照)でコントラストを補正するための当該第2補正強度テーブルTC2が記録されている。更に、補正強度「強」に相当する上記第3補正強度テーブルとしては、例えば図24(d)に例示するような態様(図24(c)に例示する場合との相違は図24(d)中破線矢印参照)でコントラストを補正するための第3補正強度テーブルが記録されている。なお、各補正強度テーブルTCに含まれる具体的な補正強度パラメータの値としては、例えば、年代別の分光視感効率を規定したJIS S0031規格に沿って設定するのが好ましい。 Next, the intensity correction table TC will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As described above, the control unit 21 designates the intensity correction table TC used for the contrast correction for the pixels of the image information Sin corresponding to the contrast correction target portion of the image displayed on the display 23. The intensity correction table designating signal is output to the recording unit 24. At this time, as the intensity correction table TC according to the third embodiment, for example, a first intensity correction table TC1 corresponding to the contrast correction intensity “weak” and a second correction intensity table corresponding to the correction intensity “medium”. TC2 and a third intensity correction table corresponding to the correction intensity “strong” are set in advance, and intensity correction parameters corresponding to the respective correction intensity tables TC are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner. In this case, n is “3”. The relationship between the input pixel value and the output pixel value in each color when the display 23 is a 24-bit liquid crystal display using the RGB color space and the contrast is not corrected is the relationship illustrated in FIG. If there is, the first correction intensity table TC1 corresponding to the correction intensity “weak” is different from the example illustrated in FIG. 24B (the case illustrated in FIG. 24A, for example). The first correction intensity table TC1 for correcting the contrast is recorded in (b) (see the middle broken arrow). Similarly, the second correction intensity table TC2 corresponding to the correction intensity “medium” is different from the example illustrated in FIG. 24C (the case illustrated in FIG. 24B, for example). The second correction strength table TC2 for correcting the contrast is recorded in (c) (see the broken line arrow). Furthermore, as the third correction intensity table corresponding to the correction intensity “strong”, for example, the difference from the case illustrated in FIG. 24D (the case illustrated in FIG. 24C) is different from FIG. A third correction intensity table for correcting the contrast is recorded in the middle dashed arrow). The specific correction intensity parameter values included in each correction intensity table TC are preferably set in accordance with, for example, the JIS S0031 standard that defines the spectral luminous efficiency by age.
 一方上述したように制御部21は、コントラストの補正については、年齢データSageにより示される年齢等に基づき、その年齢等に対応した強度補正テーブルTCを指定するための上記補正強度テーブル指定信号を生成する。 On the other hand, as described above, the control unit 21 generates the correction intensity table designation signal for designating the intensity correction table TC corresponding to the age or the like based on the age or the like indicated by the age data Sage for the contrast correction. To do.
 より具体的に、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が予め設定された第1閾値年齢以下の「子供」に該当する年齢である場合、一般に子供の眼では画像の暗い部分及び明るい部分共に比較的見易いとされている。そこで制御部21は、コントラストの補正自体をオフとする(即ち、オフ信号に相当する上記コントラスト補正オン/オフ信号を生成してコントラスト補正判定部22に出力する)か、又は当該補正の強度を「弱」とするべく上記第1補正強度テーブルTC1を指定するための補正強度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。 More specifically, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to a “child” that is equal to or lower than a first threshold age set in advance, generally, the dark and bright portions of the image are relatively easy to see with the eyes of the child. It is said that. Therefore, the control unit 21 turns off the contrast correction itself (that is, generates the contrast correction on / off signal corresponding to the off signal and outputs it to the contrast correction determination unit 22), or sets the intensity of the correction. A correction intensity table designation signal for designating the first correction intensity table TC1 to generate “weak” is generated and output to the recording unit 24.
 一方、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記第1閾値年齢より高く且つ予め設定された第2閾値年齢以下の「成人」に該当する年齢である場合、一般に成人の眼でも暗い部分及び明るい部分共に比較的見易いとされている。そこで制御部21は、上記「子供」の場合と同様に、コントラストの補正自体をオフとするか、又は上記第1補正強度テーブルTC1を指定するための補正強度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。なおこのとき、ディスプレイ23自体の明るさ(ブライトネス)が強いと眼が疲れ易いと言われているため、制御部21がコントラストの補正強度を上げるための補正強度テーブルTCを指定すると共に当該ブライトネスを下げるように制御することで、画像としての視認性を確保しつつ、眼の疲れを軽減するように構成してもよい。 On the other hand, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to an “adult” that is higher than the first threshold age and is equal to or lower than the second threshold age set in advance, generally both dark and bright portions of an adult eye It is said that it is relatively easy to see. Therefore, as in the case of the “child”, the control unit 21 turns off the contrast correction itself or generates a correction intensity table designation signal for designating the first correction intensity table TC1 to generate a recording unit. 24. At this time, if the brightness (brightness) of the display 23 itself is strong, it is said that the eyes are likely to get tired. Therefore, the control unit 21 designates a correction strength table TC for increasing the contrast correction strength and sets the brightness. It may be configured to reduce eye fatigue while ensuring visibility as an image by controlling to lower.
 更に、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記第2閾値年齢より高い「高齢者」の年齢である場合、一般に画像の暗い部分が見えづらいとされている。そこで制御部21は、コントラストの補正の強度を「中」又は「強」とするべく上記第2補正強度テーブルTC2又は上記第3補正強度テーブルを指定するための補正強度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。 Furthermore, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an “elderly” age that is higher than the second threshold age, it is generally difficult to see a dark part of the image. Therefore, the control unit 21 generates a correction intensity table designation signal for designating the second correction intensity table TC2 or the third correction intensity table so as to set the contrast correction intensity to “medium” or “strong”. Output to the recording unit 24.
 以上の制御部21、コントラスト補正判定部22、記録部24及びコントラスト補正画素値更新部25の動作により、年齢データSageにより示される年齢に基づいてディスプレイ23に表示される画像のコントラストの強度が適切に補正される。なお、上記第1閾値年齢及び上記第2閾値年齢それぞれの具体的な値は、例えば統計的或いは経験的な数値に基づいて予め設定されていればよい。 Due to the operations of the control unit 21, the contrast correction determination unit 22, the recording unit 24, and the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25, the contrast intensity of the image displayed on the display 23 is appropriately set based on the age indicated by the age data Sage. It is corrected to. Note that specific values of the first threshold age and the second threshold age may be set in advance based on, for example, statistical or empirical numerical values.
 次に、上記制御部21の動作により色補正判定部26は、当該制御部21からの上記色補正オン/オフ信号に基づき、上記画像のうち上記色の補正の対象とする部分に相当する上記コントラスト補正画像情報Sccの画素については、その画素値を色補正画素値更新部28に出力する。一方、上記画像のうち上記色の補正の対象とする部分以外の部分に相当する上記コントラスト補正画像情報Sccの画素については、その画素値をそのままブルーライト制御判定部30に出力する。 Next, the operation of the control unit 21 causes the color correction determination unit 26 to correspond to the portion of the image that is subject to color correction based on the color correction on / off signal from the control unit 21. For the pixel of the contrast correction image information Scc, the pixel value is output to the color correction pixel value update unit 28. On the other hand, the pixel value of the pixel of the contrast-corrected image information Scc corresponding to the portion other than the portion subjected to the color correction in the image is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as it is.
 そして記録部24は、制御部21からの上記色補正テーブル指定信号により指定されている色補正テーブルTLに含まれる色補正パラメータを、色補正画素値更新部28に出力する。 Then, the recording unit 24 outputs the color correction parameters included in the color correction table TL specified by the color correction table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the color correction pixel value update unit 28.
 これらにより色補正画素値更新部28は、色補正判定部26から出力されてくるコントラスト補正画像情報Sccに含まれている各画素における例えば各色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部24から出力された上記色補正パラメータに対応した画素値に更に更新し、その色が当該色補正パラメータに基づいて補正された色補正画像情報Sclとしてブルーライト制御判定部30に出力する。 Accordingly, the color correction pixel value update unit 28 outputs, for example, the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the contrast correction image information Scc output from the color correction determination unit 26 from the recording unit 24. The pixel value corresponding to the color correction parameter is further updated, and the color is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as color corrected image information Scl corrected based on the color correction parameter.
 次に上記色補正テーブルTLについて説明する。上述したように制御部21は、ディスプレイ23に表示される画像のうち上記色の補正の対象とする部分に相当するコントラスト補正画像情報Sccの画素について、当該色の補正に用いられる色補正テーブルTLを指定する上記色補正テーブル指定信号を記録部24に出力する。このとき、第3実施形態に係る色補正テーブルTLとしては、例えば、高齢者において加齢による黄斑変性に伴って画像全体が黄色っぽく見えるようになっていわゆる寒色が見えづらくなっている場合に備え、いわゆる暖色の比率を上げる色補正を行うための色補正テーブルTLが予め設定され、それに相当する色補正パラメータが記録部24に不揮発性に記録されている。この場合、上記mが「1」であることになる。なお、当該色補正テーブルTLに含まれる具体的な色補正パラメータの値としては、例えば、年齢を考慮した基本色領域に基づく組み合わせ方法を規定したJIS S0033規格、或いは「シニアコム 色に関するアンケート(例えばURL「http://www.seniorcom.co.jp/pdf/120615_survey_iro.pdf」参照)」等の内容に沿って設定するのが好ましい。 Next, the color correction table TL will be described. As described above, the control unit 21 uses the color correction table TL used for correcting the color of the pixel of the contrast-corrected image information Scc corresponding to the portion to be corrected for the color in the image displayed on the display 23. The color correction table designating signal for designating is output to the recording unit 24. At this time, as the color correction table TL according to the third embodiment, for example, in an elderly person, the entire image looks yellowish due to macular degeneration due to aging, so that a so-called cold color is difficult to see. A color correction table TL for performing color correction for increasing the so-called warm color ratio is set in advance, and color correction parameters corresponding to the color correction table TL are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner. In this case, m is “1”. Note that specific color correction parameter values included in the color correction table TL include, for example, the JIS S0033 standard that defines a combination method based on the basic color region in consideration of age, or a “Senior Com color questionnaire (for example, URL It is preferable to set according to the content such as “http://www.seniorcom.co.jp/pdf/120615_survey_iro.pdf”).
 一方上述したように制御部21は、色の補正については、年齢データSageにより示される年齢等に基づき、その年齢等に対応した色補正テーブルTLを指定するための上記色補正テーブル指定信号を生成する。 On the other hand, as described above, the control unit 21 generates the color correction table designation signal for designating the color correction table TL corresponding to the age or the like based on the age or the like indicated by the age data Sage. To do.
 より具体的に、例えばディスプレイ23の出荷時等において既定の測色器により測定された色の再現が正常である場合、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記「子供」に該当する年齢であるとき及び上記「成人」に該当する年齢であるときには、一般に色の補正は不要であるとされている。そこで制御部21は、色の補正自体をオフとする(即ち、オフ信号に相当する上記色補正オン/オフ信号を生成して色補正判定部26に出力する)と共に、上記色補正テーブル指定信号は生成しない。 More specifically, for example, when the color reproduction measured by a predetermined colorimeter is normal at the time of shipment of the display 23 or the like, the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to the above “child”. In addition, it is generally said that color correction is unnecessary when the age falls under the “adult”. Therefore, the control unit 21 turns off the color correction itself (that is, generates the color correction on / off signal corresponding to the off signal and outputs it to the color correction determination unit 26), and the color correction table designation signal. Does not generate.
 これに対し、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記「高齢者」に該当する年齢である場合、上記黄斑変性の可能性を考慮して制御部21は、第3実施形態に係る色の補正を行うべく上記色補正テーブルTLを指定するための色補正テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。 On the other hand, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to the “elderly”, the control unit 21 performs color correction according to the third embodiment in consideration of the possibility of the macular degeneration. A color correction table specifying signal for specifying the color correction table TL is generated and output to the recording unit 24.
 以上の制御部21、記録部24、色補正判定部26及び色補正画素値更新部28の動作により、年齢データSageにより示される年齢に基づいてディスプレイ23に表示される画像の色が適切に補正される。 By the operations of the control unit 21, the recording unit 24, the color correction determination unit 26, and the color correction pixel value update unit 28, the color of the image displayed on the display 23 is appropriately corrected based on the age indicated by the age data Sage. Is done.
 次に、上記制御部21の動作によりブルーライト制御判定部30は、当該制御部21からの上記ブルーライト制御オン/オフ信号に基づき、上記画像のうち上記ブルーライトの制御の対象とする部分に相当する上記色補正画像情報Sclの画素については、その画素値をブルーライト制御画素値更新部31に出力する。一方、上記画像のうち上記ブルーライトの制御の対象とする部分以外の部分に相当する上記色補正画像情報Sclの画素については、その画素値をそのままディスプレイ23に出力する。 Next, the operation of the control unit 21 causes the blue light control determination unit 30 to detect the blue light control target portion of the image based on the blue light control on / off signal from the control unit 21. For the corresponding pixel of the color correction image information Scl, the pixel value is output to the blue light control pixel value updating unit 31. On the other hand, the pixel value of the color-corrected image information Scl corresponding to a portion other than the portion to be controlled by the blue light in the image is output to the display 23 as it is.
 そして記録部24は、制御部21からの上記輝度テーブル指定信号により指定されている輝度テーブルTBに含まれる輝度制御パラメータを、ブルーライト制御画素値更新部31に出力する。 Then, the recording unit 24 outputs the luminance control parameter included in the luminance table TB specified by the luminance table specifying signal from the control unit 21 to the blue light control pixel value updating unit 31.
 これらによりブルーライト制御画素値更新部31は、ブルーライト制御判定部30から出力されてくる色補正画像情報Sclに含まれている各画素における例えば各色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部24から出力された上記輝度制御パラメータに対応した画素値に更新し、対応するブルーライトの輝度が当該輝度制御パラメータに基づいて制御されたブルーライト制御画像情報Sbcとしてディスプレイ23に出力する。 Accordingly, the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 outputs, for example, the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 from the recording unit 24. The pixel value corresponding to the brightness control parameter is updated, and the corresponding blue light brightness is output to the display 23 as blue light control image information Sbc controlled based on the brightness control parameter.
 次に、上記輝度テーブルTBについて、具体的に図25を用いて説明する。上述したように制御部21は、ディスプレイ23に表示される画像のうち上記ブルーライトの制御の対象とする部分に相当する色補正画像情報Sclの画素について、当該ブルーライトの制御に用いられる輝度テーブルTBを指定する上記輝度テーブル指定信号を記録部24に出力する。 Next, the brightness table TB will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As described above, the control unit 21 uses the luminance table used for controlling the blue light for the pixels of the color correction image information Scl corresponding to the portion to be controlled by the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23. The luminance table designation signal for designating TB is output to the recording unit 24.
 ここで第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御では、例えば、ディスプレイ23に表示される画像における青色成分の画素値(輝度値)を他の色成分の画素値に対して相対的に小さくする方法や、ディスプレイ23のバックライトの輝度自体を低減する方法等を用いて、当該画像におけるブルーライトの輝度を低減する。これに加えて第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御では、例えば図25に示すように、一日のうちの時刻(図25横軸参照)に応じてディスプレイ23に表示される画像におけるブルーライトの低減率(図25縦軸参照)を制御する。即ち、上記画像を視るユーザの活動時間帯が昼間である場合、当該ユーザが就寝する夜間よりも低減率を下げる(換言すれば、夜間に比べて昼間にブルーライトの輝度を増強する)。図25に例示する低減率の制御パターンを用いてブルーライトを制御するのは、一般にブルーライトは人の時刻調整に作用するとも言われており、時刻に応じたそのオン/オフ又は低減率の変更(制御)を行うべきとされているからである。図25に例示する制御パターンは、昼間はブルーライトがより必要となり、屋内における通常の生活だけでは足りない可能性も指摘されていることによる。そして、上述したようなブルーライトの制御に供される、第3実施形態に係る輝度テーブルTBとしては、図25に例示する変化を有する時刻毎のブルーライトの低減率を示す輝度テーブルTBが、上記年齢等毎に複数予め設定され、それぞれの輝度テーブルTBに相当する輝度制御パラメータが記録部24に不揮発性に記録されている。このとき、年齢毎の輝度テーブルTBとしては例えば、低減率が予め設定された第1低減率閾値以上である「低減率;大」の第1輝度テーブルTB1と、低減率が上記第1低減率閾値未満で且つ予め設定された第2低減率閾値以上である「低減率;中」の第2輝度テーブルTB2と、低減率が上記第2低減率閾値未満である「低減率;小」の第3輝度テーブルと、が、記録部24に記録されている。この場合、上記pが「3」であることになる。このとき、「低減率;大」の第1輝度テーブルTB1、「低減率;中」の第2輝度テーブルTB2及び「低減率;小」の第3輝度テーブルそれぞれにおける時刻毎の低減率の変化は、例えば図25に例示する変化に相当する変化となるように予め設定されている。なお、各輝度テーブルTBに含まれる具体的な輝度制御パラメータの値としては、例えば、黄斑変性の年齢別受療数(例えば、URL「http://homepage3.nifty.com/SAI-EYE-CLINIC/page/ohan/ohan.html」参照)」等の内容に沿って設定するのが好ましい。また、上記第1低減率閾値及び上記第2低減率閾値それぞれの具体的な値は、例えば統計的或いは経験的な数値に基づいて予め設定されていればよい。 Here, in the blue light control according to the third embodiment, for example, a method of reducing the pixel value (luminance value) of the blue component in the image displayed on the display 23 relative to the pixel values of the other color components. Alternatively, the luminance of the blue light in the image is reduced by using a method for reducing the luminance of the backlight of the display 23 itself. In addition to this, in the blue light control according to the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25, the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23 according to the time of day (see the horizontal axis in FIG. 25). The reduction rate (see the vertical axis in FIG. 25) is controlled. That is, when the activity time zone of the user who views the image is daytime, the reduction rate is lower than that at night when the user goes to bed (in other words, the brightness of the blue light is increased in the daytime compared to the nighttime). The blue light is controlled using the control pattern of the reduction rate illustrated in FIG. 25, and it is generally said that the blue light acts on the time adjustment of a person. This is because the change (control) should be performed. The control pattern illustrated in FIG. 25 is because blue light is more necessary during the daytime, and it is pointed out that there is a possibility that ordinary living indoors is not sufficient. Then, as the luminance table TB according to the third embodiment, which is used for the blue light control as described above, the luminance table TB indicating the blue light reduction rate for each time having the change illustrated in FIG. A plurality of brightness control parameters that are set in advance for each age and the like and that correspond to each brightness table TB are recorded in the recording unit 24 in a nonvolatile manner. At this time, as the luminance table TB for each age, for example, a first luminance table TB1 of “reduction rate; large” in which the reduction rate is equal to or higher than a preset first reduction rate threshold, and the reduction rate is the first reduction rate. The second luminance table TB2 of “reduction rate; medium” which is less than the threshold and equal to or higher than the preset second reduction rate threshold, and the “reduction rate; A three luminance table is recorded in the recording unit 24. In this case, the p is “3”. At this time, changes in the reduction rate for each time in the first luminance table TB1 of “reduction rate; high”, the second luminance table TB2 of “reduction rate; medium”, and the third luminance table of “reduction rate; small” are as follows: For example, a change corresponding to the change illustrated in FIG. 25 is set in advance. Note that specific brightness control parameter values included in each brightness table TB include, for example, the number of treatments by age of macular degeneration (for example, URL “http://homepage3.nifty.com/SAI-EYE-CLINIC/ It is preferable to set according to the contents such as “page / ohan / ohan.html”). In addition, specific values of the first reduction rate threshold and the second reduction rate threshold may be set in advance based on, for example, statistical or empirical numerical values.
 そして、上述したように制御部21は、ブルーライトの制御については、年齢データSageにより示される年齢等及び時刻データStにより示される現在時刻に基づき、その年齢等及び現在時刻に対応した輝度テーブルTBを指定するための上記輝度テーブル指定信号を生成する。 As described above, the control unit 21 controls the blue light based on the age and the like indicated by the age data Sage and the current time indicated by the time data St, and the luminance table TB corresponding to the age and the like. The brightness table designating signal for designating is generated.
 より具体的に制御部21は、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記「子供」に該当する年齢である場合、一般に子供の眼は成長過程にあるため外光等の影響を受け易いとされており、成人の眼よりも感受性が強いとされている。また、加齢と共に小さくなるとされている眼の瞳孔も子供のうちは大きく、成人の眼よりも外光が眼の中に入り易い状態にあるとされており、これらのことは即ち、子供の眼は上記ブルーライトの透過率が高いことを示している。従ってこの場合に制御部21は、上記「低減率;大」の第1輝度テーブルTB1を指定する輝度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。 More specifically, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to the above-mentioned “child”, the control unit 21 is generally considered to be easily affected by external light or the like because the child's eyes are in the process of growth. It is said to be more sensitive than adult eyes. In addition, the pupil of the eye, which is supposed to become smaller with age, is larger among children, and it is said that external light is more likely to enter the eye than adult eyes. The eye shows that the transmittance of the blue light is high. Therefore, in this case, the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designation signal for designating the first luminance table TB1 having the above “reduction rate;
 一方、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記「成人」に該当する年齢である場合では、例えばディスプレイ23を長時間に渡って視続ける作業では、バックライトを構成する上記LEDが発するブルーライトが、いわゆる加齢黄斑変性症や睡眠障害(いわゆるサーカディアンリズムの乱れ)の原因となる可能性があるとされている。従ってこの場合に制御部21は、上記「低減率;大」の第1輝度テーブルTB1又は「低減率;中」の第2輝度テーブルTB2を指定する輝度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。 On the other hand, in the case where the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to the above “adult”, for example, in the operation of continuing to watch the display 23 for a long time, the blue light emitted from the LED constituting the backlight is It is said that it may cause so-called age-related macular degeneration and sleep disturbance (so-called circadian rhythm disturbance). Therefore, in this case, the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designating signal for designating the first luminance table TB1 having the “reduction rate; large” or the second luminance table TB2 having the “reduction rate; Output.
 更に、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が上記「高齢者」の年齢である場合、そのユーザが例えば加齢黄斑変性に罹っていることが上記年齢データSage等により示されているのであれば、そもそも当該黄斑変性によりブルーライト自体がカットされてしまう。従ってこの場合に制御部21は、上記「低減率;小」の第3輝度テーブルを指定する輝度テーブル指定信号を生成して記録部24に出力する。なおこの場合に制御部21は、当該輝度テーブル指定信号を出力せずに、第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御自体をオフとする旨の上記ブルーライト制御オン/オフ信号を生成して、ブルーライト制御判定部30に出力してもよい。 Furthermore, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is the age of the “elderly person”, if the age data Sage or the like indicates that the user is suffering from age-related macular degeneration, for example, The blue light itself is cut by the macular degeneration. Accordingly, in this case, the control unit 21 generates a luminance table designation signal for designating the third luminance table of “reduction rate; small” and outputs the luminance table designation signal to the recording unit 24. In this case, the control unit 21 generates the blue light control on / off signal for turning off the blue light control itself according to the third embodiment without outputting the luminance table designation signal, and You may output to the blue light control determination part 30. FIG.
 以上の制御部21、ブルーライト制御判定部30、記録部24及びブルーライト制御画素値更新部31の動作により、年齢データSageにより示される年齢に基づいてディスプレイ23に表示される画像におけるブルーライトが適切に制御される。 By the operations of the control unit 21, the blue light control determination unit 30, the recording unit 24, and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31, the blue light in the image displayed on the display 23 based on the age indicated by the age data Sage is generated. Appropriately controlled.
 なお、ブルーライトの輝度の低減については、上記ブルーライト制御判定部30及びブルーライト制御画素値更新部31等の動作による方法の他に、ディスプレイ23のバックライトを構成するLED自体の輝度(ブライトネス)を画像の部分的又は全体として低減することにより、当該ブルーライトの輝度を低減する構成としてもよい。この場合に制御部21は、例えば図25に例示する変化に沿って上記LEDの輝度を制御する。 In addition to the method based on the operations of the blue light control determination unit 30 and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 and the like, the luminance of the LEDs constituting the backlight of the display 23 (brightness) can be reduced. ) May be reduced partially or entirely in the image to reduce the luminance of the blue light. In this case, the control unit 21 controls the luminance of the LED along the change illustrated in FIG. 25, for example.
 最後にディスプレイ23は、ブルーライト制御判定部30から出力されてきた色補正画像情報Scl又はブルーライト制御画素値更新部31から出力されてきたブルーライト制御画像情報Sbcのいずれか一方を表示情報Soutとして受信し、当該表示情報Soutに相当する画像を表示する。 Finally, the display 23 displays either the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 or the blue light control image information Sbc output from the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 as display information Sout. And an image corresponding to the display information Sout is displayed.
 次に、第3実施形態に係る制御処理について、時系列的に纏めつつ図26を用いて説明する。なお、図26に示す当該制御処理は、例えば表示装置D3の電源スイッチがオンとされたタイミングから開始され、主として制御部21を中心として実行される。 Next, control processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The control process shown in FIG. 26 is started, for example, from the timing when the power switch of the display device D3 is turned on, and is mainly executed mainly by the control unit 21.
 図26に示すように、第3実施形態に係る制御処理においては初めに、上記年齢データ取得部27を介して上記年齢データSageを取得し(ステップS15)、更に上記時刻取得部29を介して上記時刻データStを取得する(ステップS16)。このとき、ステップS16の時刻データStは例えば所定の時間間隔で定期的に実行するのが好ましいが、ステップS15の年齢データSageの取得は、例えば表示装置D3の上記電源スイッチがオンとされたタイミング毎に実行するのが好ましい。 As shown in FIG. 26, in the control process according to the third embodiment, first, the age data Sage is acquired through the age data acquisition unit 27 (step S15), and further through the time acquisition unit 29. The time data St is acquired (step S16). At this time, it is preferable that the time data St in step S16 is periodically executed at a predetermined time interval, for example, but the acquisition of the age data Sage in step S15 is, for example, the timing when the power switch of the display device D3 is turned on. It is preferable to execute every time.
 次に、画像生成部20から上記画像情報Sinが入力されると、最初にコントラスト補正判定部22に取り込まれる(ステップS17)。そして制御部21は、上述した基準に従って第3実施形態に係るコントラストの補正を実行するか否かを判定し、その判定結果に対応する上記コントラスト補正オン/オフ信号を生成して制御信号Scとしてコントラスト補正判定部22に出力する(ステップS18)。ステップS18の判定において第3実施形態に係るコントラストの補正を実行しない場合(ステップS18;NO)、コントラスト補正判定部22は画像情報Sinをそのまま色補正判定部26に出力し、更に制御部21は後述するステップS21に移行する。一方ステップS18の判定において第3実施形態に係るコントラストの補正を実行する場合(ステップS18;YES)、コントラスト補正判定部22は画像情報Sinをコントラスト補正画素値更新部25に出力すると共に、制御部21は、上述した基準に従って上記強度補正テーブル指定信号を生成し、制御信号Scとして記録部24に出力することで、その時点で必要とされている強度補正テーブルTCを指定する(ステップS19)。 Next, when the image information Sin is input from the image generation unit 20, it is first taken into the contrast correction determination unit 22 (step S17). Then, the control unit 21 determines whether or not to execute the contrast correction according to the third embodiment, generates the contrast correction on / off signal corresponding to the determination result, and generates the control signal Sc. It outputs to the contrast correction | amendment determination part 22 (step S18). When the contrast correction according to the third embodiment is not executed in the determination in step S18 (step S18; NO), the contrast correction determination unit 22 outputs the image information Sin as it is to the color correction determination unit 26, and the control unit 21 further The process proceeds to step S21 described later. On the other hand, when the contrast correction according to the third embodiment is executed in the determination in step S18 (step S18; YES), the contrast correction determination unit 22 outputs the image information Sin to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 and the control unit. 21 generates the intensity correction table designation signal in accordance with the above-described standard, and outputs it as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24, thereby designating the intensity correction table TC required at that time (step S19).
 そして記録部24では、制御部21からの上記強度補正テーブル指定信号により示されている強度補正テーブルTCの選定(換言すれば、コントラストの補正の強度の指定)が行われ、当該選定された強度補正テーブルTCに含まれる強度補正パラメータがコントラスト補正画素値更新部25に出力される。 In the recording unit 24, the intensity correction table TC indicated by the intensity correction table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the intensity of contrast correction is designated), and the selected intensity is selected. The intensity correction parameter included in the correction table TC is output to the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25.
 これらによりコントラスト補正画素値更新部25は、コントラスト補正判定部22から出力されてくる画像情報Sinに含まれている各画素における各色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部24から出力された強度補正パラメータにより示される画素値に更新し(ステップS20)、上記コントラスト補正画像情報Sccとして色補正判定部26に出力する。 Accordingly, the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 uses the intensity correction parameter output from the recording unit 24 to calculate the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the image information Sin output from the contrast correction determination unit 22. Is updated to the pixel value indicated by (step S20), and is output to the color correction determination unit 26 as the contrast-corrected image information Scc.
 次に制御部21は、上述した基準に従って第3実施形態に係る色の補正を実行するか否かを判定し、その判定結果に対応する上記色補正オン/オフ信号を生成して制御信号Scとして色補正判定部26に出力する(ステップS21)。ステップS21の判定において第3実施形態に係る色の補正を実行しない場合(ステップS21;NO)、色補正判定部26はコントラスト補正画素値更新部25から出力されてきた上記コントラスト補正画像情報Sccをそのままブルーライト制御判定部30に出力し、更に制御部21は後述するステップS24に移行する。一方ステップS21の判定において第3実施形態に係る色の補正を実行する場合(ステップS21;YES)、色補正判定部26はコントラスト補正画像情報Sccを色補正画素値更新部28に出力すると共に、制御部21は、上述した基準に従って上記色補正テーブル指定信号を生成し、制御信号Scとして記録部24に出力することで、その時点で必要とされている色補正テーブルTLを指定する(ステップS22)。 Next, the control unit 21 determines whether or not to perform color correction according to the third embodiment in accordance with the above-described criteria, generates the color correction on / off signal corresponding to the determination result, and generates the control signal Sc. Is output to the color correction determination unit 26 (step S21). When the color correction according to the third embodiment is not executed in the determination in step S21 (step S21; NO), the color correction determination unit 26 uses the contrast correction image information Scc output from the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25. The data is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as it is, and the control unit 21 proceeds to step S24 described later. On the other hand, when color correction according to the third embodiment is executed in the determination in step S21 (step S21; YES), the color correction determination unit 26 outputs the contrast correction image information Scc to the color correction pixel value update unit 28, and The control unit 21 generates the color correction table designation signal in accordance with the above-described criteria, and outputs it as the control signal Sc to the recording unit 24, thereby designating the color correction table TL required at that time (step S22). ).
 そして記録部24では、制御部21からの上記色補正テーブル指定信号により示されている色補正テーブルTLの選定(換言すれば、色の補正態様の指定)が行われ、当該選定された色補正テーブルTLに含まれる色補正パラメータが色補正画素値更新部28に出力される。 In the recording unit 24, the color correction table TL indicated by the color correction table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the color correction mode is designated), and the selected color correction is performed. The color correction parameters included in the table TL are output to the color correction pixel value update unit 28.
 これらにより色補正画素値更新部28は、色補正判定部26から出力されてくるコントラスト補正画像情報Sccに含まれている各画素における各色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部24から出力された色補正パラメータにより示される画素値に更新し(ステップS23)、上記色補正画像情報Sclとしてブルーライト制御判定部30に出力する。 As a result, the color correction pixel value update unit 28 outputs the pixel values of the respective color components in the pixels included in the contrast correction image information Scc output from the color correction determination unit 26 to the color output from the recording unit 24. The pixel value indicated by the correction parameter is updated (step S23), and is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 as the color correction image information Scl.
 次に制御部21は、上述した基準に従って第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御を実行するか否かを判定し、その判定結果に対応する上記ブルーライト制御オン/オフ信号を生成して制御信号Scとしてブルーライト制御判定部30に出力する(ステップS24)。ステップS24の判定において第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御を実行しない場合(ステップS24;NO)、ブルーライト制御判定部30は色補正画素値更新部28から出力されてきた上記色補正画像情報Sclをそのままディスプレイ23に表示情報Soutとして出力する(ステップS27)。一方ステップS24の判定において第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御を実行する場合(ステップS24;YES)、ブルーライト制御判定部30は色補正画像情報Sclをブルーライト制御画素値更新部31に出力すると共に、制御部21は、上述した基準に従って上記輝度テーブル指定信号を生成し、制御信号Scとして記録部24に出力することで、その時点で必要とされている輝度テーブルTBを指定する(ステップS25)。 Next, the control unit 21 determines whether or not to execute the blue light control according to the third embodiment in accordance with the above-described criterion, and generates and controls the blue light control on / off signal corresponding to the determination result. The signal Sc is output to the blue light control determination unit 30 (step S24). When the blue light control according to the third embodiment is not executed in the determination in step S24 (step S24; NO), the blue light control determination unit 30 outputs the color correction image information output from the color correction pixel value update unit 28. Scl is output as it is to the display 23 as display information Sout (step S27). On the other hand, when the blue light control according to the third embodiment is executed in the determination in step S24 (step S24; YES), the blue light control determination unit 30 outputs the color correction image information Scl to the blue light control pixel value update unit 31. At the same time, the control unit 21 generates the luminance table designation signal in accordance with the above-described standard, and outputs it to the recording unit 24 as the control signal Sc, thereby designating the luminance table TB required at that time (step). S25).
 そして記録部24では、制御部21からの上記輝度テーブル指定信号により示されている輝度テーブルTBの選定(換言すれば、ブルーライトの低減率の指定)が行われ、当該選定された輝度テーブルTBに含まれる輝度制御パラメータがブルーライト制御画素値更新部31に出力される。 In the recording unit 24, the luminance table TB indicated by the luminance table designation signal from the control unit 21 is selected (in other words, the blue light reduction rate is designated), and the selected luminance table TB is selected. Are output to the blue light control pixel value update unit 31.
 これらによりブルーライト制御画素値更新部31は、ブルーライト制御判定部30から出力されてくる色補正画像情報Sclに含まれている各画素における各色成分それぞれの画素値を、記録部24から出力された輝度制御パラメータにより示される画素値に更新し(ステップS26)、上記ブルーライト制御画像情報Sbcとしてディスプレイ23に表示情報Soutとして出力する。 Accordingly, the blue light control pixel value update unit 31 outputs the pixel value of each color component in each pixel included in the color correction image information Scl output from the blue light control determination unit 30 from the recording unit 24. The pixel value indicated by the brightness control parameter is updated (step S26), and is output as display information Sout to the display 23 as the blue light control image information Sbc.
 そしてディスプレイ23は、上記色補正画像情報Scl又は上記ブルーライト制御画像情報Sbcのいずれか一方を表示情報Soutとして受信し、当該表示情報Soutに相当する画像を表示する(ステップS27)。その後制御部21は第3実施形態に係る制御処理を終了する。 The display 23 receives either the color correction image information Scl or the blue light control image information Sbc as display information Sout, and displays an image corresponding to the display information Sout (step S27). Thereafter, the control unit 21 ends the control process according to the third embodiment.
 以上それぞれ説明したように、第3実施形態に係る制御処理によれば、画像情報Sinにおけるブルーライトの輝度を年齢データSageに基づいて低減しつつ、当該年齢データSageに基づいて画像情報Sinに相当する画像を表示する。よって、当該画像を視認するユーザの年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該ユーザの眼を保護しつつ、画像を表示することができる。 As described above, according to the control processing according to the third embodiment, the luminance of the blue light in the image information Sin is reduced based on the age data Sage, and is equivalent to the image information Sin based on the age data Sage. Display the image to be played. Therefore, the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image and while protecting the user's eyes.
 また、第3実施形態に係る制御処理として、ブルーライトの制御、コントラストの補正、及び色の補正、のいずれかを画像情報Sinに対して実行して画像を表示するので、多面的な制御処理により、画像を視認するユーザの年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該ユーザの眼を効果的に保護しつつ、画像を表示することができる。 In addition, as the control processing according to the third embodiment, any one of blue light control, contrast correction, and color correction is executed on the image information Sin to display an image. Thus, the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image and while effectively protecting the user's eyes.
 更に、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が「子供」に相当する年齢又は「成人」に相当する年齢である場合に、ブルーライトの輝度の低減率を大きくすると共に、コントラストの補正の強度を「弱」以下とするので、子供又は成人の眼を保護すると共に、見易いコントラストの状態で画像を表示することができる。 Further, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to “child” or an age corresponding to “adult”, the luminance reduction rate of the blue light is increased and the contrast correction intensity is set to “weak”. Therefore, the eyes of a child or an adult can be protected and an image can be displayed in a contrast state that is easy to see.
 更にまた、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が「成年」に相当する年齢である場合において、ブルーライトの輝度の低減率を大きくすると共に、コントラストの補正強度を上げると共にディスプレイ23の明るさ(ブライトネス)を下げるように制御すれば、画像としての視認性を確保しつつ、眼の疲れを軽減して画像を表示することができる。 Furthermore, when the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to “adult”, the luminance reduction rate of the blue light is increased, the contrast correction strength is increased, and the brightness (brightness) of the display 23 is increased. If the control is performed to lower the image, it is possible to display an image while reducing eye fatigue while ensuring the visibility as an image.
 また、年齢データSageにより示される年齢が「高齢者」に相当する年齢であり、且つ、そのユーザが例えば黄斑変性に罹っていることが示されている場合において、ブルーライトの輝度の低減率を小さくすると共に、コントラストの補正強度を「中」又は「強」とし、当該年齢に基づいて色を補正して画像を表示するので、高齢者において見易い状態で画像を表示することができる。 Further, in the case where the age indicated by the age data Sage is an age corresponding to “elderly” and the user is shown to suffer from, for example, macular degeneration, the luminance reduction rate of blue light is Since the contrast correction strength is set to “medium” or “strong” and the image is displayed with the color corrected based on the age, the image can be displayed in an easy-to-view state for the elderly.
 更に、ブルーライトの制御を年齢データSage及び時刻データStに基づいて実行しつつ(図25参照)、当該年齢データSage及び当該時刻データStに基づいて他の制御処理を実行する場合には、画像を視認するユーザの年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該ユーザの眼を保護し、更にその視覚を通じた体内リズム等に合致させて、画像を表示させることができる。 Further, when the control of the blue light is executed based on the age data Sage and the time data St (see FIG. 25), another control process is executed based on the age data Sage and the time data St. The image can be displayed in a state that is easy to see according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image, protects the user's eyes, and matches the internal rhythm through the visual sense.
 更にまた、画像を視認するユーザの活動時間(例えば昼間)におけるブルーライトの輝度が、当該活動時間以外の時間における当該輝度に対して相対的に高くなるようにして表示用画像情報を生成する(図25参照)場合には、画像を視認するユーザの活動時間とそれ以外の時間における体内リズム等に合致させて画像を表示させることができる。なおこのとき、そのユーザが例えば夜間勤務者である場合には、図25に示す変化を図25において上下逆とした変化により、第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御を実行するのが好適である。 Furthermore, the display image information is generated so that the luminance of the blue light during the activity time (for example, daytime) of the user viewing the image is relatively higher than the luminance during the time other than the activity time ( In the case of FIG. 25), the image can be displayed in accordance with the activity time of the user who visually recognizes the image and the internal rhythm at other times. At this time, when the user is a night worker, for example, it is preferable to execute the blue light control according to the third embodiment by changing the change shown in FIG. 25 upside down in FIG. is there.
 また、新たな年齢データSageが取得された場合に、当該新たな年齢データSageに基づいてブルーライトの制御を含むいずれかの処理を改めて実行して画像を表示するように構成すれば、新たな年齢データSageが取得できた場合にも、画像を視認するユーザの年齢に応じた見易い状態で、且つ当該ユーザの眼を保護しつつ、適切に画像を表示させることができる。この場合に例えば、新たな年齢データSageにより、「高齢者」に相当する年齢のユーザに対する白内障の手術が終了した旨のデータが取得できた場合、白内障が治療されるとブルーライトの透過率が高くなるため、たとえ「高齢者」に相当する年齢のユーザであっても低減率を「大」又は「中」としてブルーライトの制御を実行するのが好ましい。 In addition, when new age data Sage is acquired, if a process is executed again to display an image based on the new age data Sage, including any control of blue light, a new one is displayed. Even when the age data Sage can be acquired, the image can be appropriately displayed in an easy-to-view state according to the age of the user who visually recognizes the image, while protecting the user's eyes. In this case, for example, when data indicating that cataract surgery has been completed for a user of an age corresponding to “elderly” can be acquired from the new age data Sage, the transmittance of blue light is increased when the cataract is treated. Therefore, even for a user of an age corresponding to “elderly”, it is preferable to execute the blue light control with the reduction rate being “large” or “medium”.
 更に、第3実施形態のようにユーザの年齢で一括りとするのではなく、例えば図示しない入力部を用いてユーザが事後的に強度補正テーブルTC、色補正テーブルTL又は輝度テーブルTBそれぞれの内容に相当する各パラメータを入力する構成とすれば、画像を視認する当該ユーザの好み等に合わせて第3実施形態に係る制御処理を実行でき、当該ユーザに適合させて画像の表示態様を調整することができる。 Furthermore, the contents of each of the intensity correction table TC, the color correction table TL, and the luminance table TB are not determined by the user's age as in the third embodiment. If the configuration corresponding to each of the parameters is input, the control processing according to the third embodiment can be executed according to the preference of the user who visually recognizes the image, and the display mode of the image is adjusted according to the user. be able to.
 なお、上述した第3実施形態については、上述の他に、種々の態様が可能である。 In addition to the above, the third embodiment described above can have various aspects.
 例えば上述した第3実施形態では、画像情報Sinに対するコントラストの補正(コントラスト補正判定部22及びコントラスト補正画素値更新部25による)→色の補正(色補正判定部26及び色補正画素値更新部28による)→ブルーライトの制御(ブルーライト制御判定部30及びブルーライト制御画素値更新部31による)の順で実行することとした。しかしながらこれ以外に、コントラストの補正、色の補正及びブルーライトの制御の順序をどのように変更してもよいし、或いは、コントラストの補正、色の補正及びブルーライトの制御を画像情報Sinに対して同時並行的に実行し、それぞれの実行結果を最後に重畳して表示情報Soutとしてディスプレイ23に出力するように構成することもできる
For example, in the third embodiment described above, contrast correction for the image information Sin (by the contrast correction determination unit 22 and the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25) → color correction (the color correction determination unit 26 and the color correction pixel value update unit 28). )) → blue light control (by the blue light control determination unit 30 and the blue light control pixel value update unit 31). However, in addition to this, the order of contrast correction, color correction, and blue light control may be changed in any way, or contrast correction, color correction, and blue light control may be performed on the image information Sin. It is also possible to execute the processing simultaneously in parallel, and superimpose the execution results at the end to output them as display information Sout to the display 23.
 また例えば、第3実施形態に係るブルーライトの制御を、日単位(図25参照)ではなく、月単位、或いは季節単位で実行するように構成することも可能である。この場合の輝度テーブルTBとしては、月毎、又は季節毎の輝度テーブルが記録部24に記録されて用いられることになる。 Also, for example, the blue light control according to the third embodiment can be configured not to be performed on a daily basis (see FIG. 25) but on a monthly or seasonal basis. As the luminance table TB in this case, a monthly or seasonal luminance table is recorded in the recording unit 24 and used.
 更に例えば、時刻データStを用いず、予め設定された低減率で例えば一律にブルーライトの制御を行うように構成してもよい。 Further, for example, the blue light may be controlled uniformly, for example, at a preset reduction rate without using the time data St.
 更にまた上述した第3実施形態において、画像内の範囲を指定して第3実施形態に係る制御処理の対象とする/しないを制御するように構成することもできる。 Furthermore, in the above-described third embodiment, it is also possible to control whether or not a range in an image is designated and controlled / not subject to control processing according to the third embodiment.
 また第3実施形態に係る制御処理は、上述したRGB色空間以外にも、例えば上記HLS色空間、HSV色空間、又は輝度(Y)を含むYCbCr色空間等に対しても同様に適用可能である。 In addition to the RGB color space described above, the control processing according to the third embodiment can be similarly applied to, for example, the HLS color space, HSV color space, or YCbCr color space including luminance (Y). is there.
 更にまた、図10、図22又は図26にそれぞれ示すフローチャートに対応するプログラムを光ディスク等の記録媒体に記録しておき、或いはインターネット等のネットワークを介して取得して記録しておき、これらを例えば汎用のマイクロコンピュータ等により読み出して実行することにより、当該マイクロコンピュータ等を、各実施形態に係る制御部2又は制御部21、切換制御部3、コントラスト補正判定部22、コントラスト補正画素値更新部25、色補正判定部26、年齢データ取得部27、色補正画素値更新部28、ブルーライト制御判定部30、ブルーライト制御画素値更新部31及び画素値更新部6並びに切換部7として機能させることも可能である。 Furthermore, the programs corresponding to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 10, 22 and 26 are recorded on a recording medium such as an optical disk, or acquired and recorded via a network such as the Internet, By reading and executing with a general-purpose microcomputer or the like, the microcomputer or the like is executed by the control unit 2 or the control unit 21, the switching control unit 3, the contrast correction determination unit 22, and the contrast correction pixel value update unit 25 according to each embodiment. , Color correction determination unit 26, age data acquisition unit 27, color correction pixel value update unit 28, blue light control determination unit 30, blue light control pixel value update unit 31, pixel value update unit 6, and switching unit 7. Is also possible.
 以上それぞれ説明したように、本発明は表示装置の分野に利用することが可能であり、特にユーザの体内リズム等の維持/調整を目的とした表示装置の制御の分野に適用すれば特に顕著な効果が得られる。 As described above, the present invention can be used in the field of display devices, and is particularly remarkable when applied to the field of display device control for the purpose of maintaining / adjusting a user's internal rhythm. An effect is obtained.
 1、20  画像生成部
 2、21  制御部
 3  切換制御部
 4、23  ディスプレイ
 5、24  記録部
 6、60  画素値更新部
 7  切換部
 8  位置検出部
 9  入力部
 10、29  時刻取得部
 22  コントラスト補正判定部
 25  コントラスト補正画素値更新部
 26  色補正判定部
 27  年齢データ取得部
 28  色補正画素値更新部
 30  ブルーライト制御判定部
 31  ブルーライト制御画素値更新部
 61、62  色空間変換部
 D1、D2、D3  表示装置
 T1  第1制御率テーブル
 T2  第2制御率テーブル
 T3  第3制御率テーブル
 Tn  第n制御率テーブル
 TC1  第1強度補正テーブル
 TC2  第2強度補正テーブル
 TCn  第n強度補正テーブル
 TL1  第1色補正テーブル
 TL2  第2色補正テーブル
 TLm  第m色補正テーブル
 TB1  第1輝度テーブル
 TB2  第2輝度テーブル
 TBp  第p輝度テーブル
 Sc  制御信号
 St  時刻データ
 Sin  画像情報
 Sop  操作信号
 Sbc  更新画像情報
 Sout  表示情報
 Spos  位置データ
 Sage  年齢データ
 Scc  コントラスト補正画像情報
 Scl  色補正画像情報
 Sbc  ブルーライト制御画像情報
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1,20 Image generation part 2, 21 Control part 3 Switching control part 4, 23 Display 5, 24 Recording part 6, 60 Pixel value update part 7 Switching part 8 Position detection part 9 Input part 10, 29 Time acquisition part 22 Contrast correction Determination unit 25 Contrast correction pixel value update unit 26 Color correction determination unit 27 Age data acquisition unit 28 Color correction pixel value update unit 30 Blue light control determination unit 31 Blue light control pixel value update unit 61, 62 Color space conversion unit D1, D2 , D3 display device T1 first control rate table T2 second control rate table T3 third control rate table Tn nth control rate table TC1 first strength correction table TC2 second strength correction table TCn nth strength correction table TL1 first color Correction table TL2 Second color correction table TLm mth color correction table TB First brightness table TB2 Second brightness table TBp pth brightness table Sc control signal St time data Sin image information Sop operation signal Sbc updated image information Sout display information Spos position data Sage age data Scc contrast correction image information Scl color correction image information Sbc Blue light control image information

Claims (17)

  1.  表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する画像情報取得手段と、
     時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時情報取得手段と、
     前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる処理手段と、
     を備えることを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    Image information acquisition means for acquiring image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display means;
    Time information acquisition means for acquiring time information indicating any of time, day, month or season;
    Processing means for controlling the luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information to generate display image information, and outputting and displaying the display means on the display means;
    An image processing apparatus comprising:
  2.  請求項1に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記取得した時情報に基づいて前記処理手段は、前記取得した画像情報における青色成分に相当する前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 1.
    The image processing apparatus, wherein the processing means generates the display image information by controlling the luminance corresponding to a blue component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information.
  3.  請求項2に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記取得した時情報に基づいて前記処理手段は、前記青色成分に相当する前記輝度につき、前記表示用画像情報に相当して前記表示手段に表示される前記画像を視認する者の活動時間における当該輝度が、当該活動時間以外の時間における当該輝度に対して相対的に高くなるように制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 2,
    Based on the acquired time information, the processing means relates to the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the activity time of the person viewing the image displayed on the display means corresponding to the display image information. An image processing apparatus, wherein the display image information is generated by controlling the brightness to be relatively higher than the brightness at a time other than the activity time.
  4.  請求項1から請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報により示される日の出の時刻又は日の入りの時刻の少なくともいずれか一方に基づき、前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    The processing means generates the display image information by controlling the luminance based on at least one of a sunrise time and a sunset time indicated by the acquired time information. .
  5.  請求項1から請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記処理手段における前記輝度の制御態様を指定するために用いられる指定手段を更に備え、
     前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報と、前記指定された制御態様と、に基づいて前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    In the image processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    Further comprising specifying means used for specifying the control mode of the luminance in the processing means;
    The image processing apparatus, wherein the processing unit generates the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and the designated control mode.
  6.  請求項5に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記制御態様を指定する場合において前記表示手段は、制御対象たる前記輝度の時間変化に相当するグラフを表示し、
     前記制御態様を指定する場合において前記指定手段は、前記表示されているグラフの一部又は全部の形状を変更して前記制御態様を指定するために用いられ、
     前記処理手段は、前記取得した時情報と、前記グラフを用いて指定された制御態様と、に基づいて前記輝度を制御して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 5.
    In the case of designating the control mode, the display means displays a graph corresponding to a temporal change in the luminance as a control target,
    In the case of designating the control mode, the designating means is used for designating the control mode by changing a part or all of the shape of the displayed graph,
    The image processing apparatus is characterized in that the processing means generates the display image information by controlling the luminance based on the acquired time information and a control mode specified using the graph.
  7.  請求項1から請求項6のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記表示手段の位置を示す位置情報を取得する位置情報取得手段を更に備え、
     前記時情報取得手段は、前記取得された位置情報により示される前記位置に対応した前記時情報を取得することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
    Further comprising position information acquisition means for acquiring position information indicating the position of the display means;
    The image processing apparatus, wherein the time information acquisition unit acquires the time information corresponding to the position indicated by the acquired position information.
  8.  請求項1に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記表示された画像を視る者の年齢に対応した年齢対応情報を取得する年齢対応情報取得手段を更に備え、
     前記処理手段は、前記画像における青色成分に相当する輝度を前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて低減しつつ、当該年齢対応情報に基づいて当該画像情報から表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させることを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 1.
    Further comprising age-corresponding information acquisition means for acquiring age-corresponding information corresponding to the age of the person viewing the displayed image,
    The processing means generates display image information from the image information based on the age correspondence information while reducing the luminance corresponding to the blue component in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information, and the display means An image processing apparatus characterized in that it is output and displayed on the screen.
  9.  請求項8に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記処理手段は、(i)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記輝度を低減する低減処理、(ii)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記画像におけるコントラストを補正するコントラスト補正処理、及び、(iii)前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記画像における色を補正する色補正処理、
     のうち、前記低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を、前記取得した画像情報に対して実行して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 8.
    The processing means includes (i) a reduction process for reducing the luminance based on the acquired age correspondence information, (ii) a contrast correction process for correcting contrast in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information, and (Iii) a color correction process for correcting a color in the image based on the acquired age correspondence information;
    An image processing apparatus, wherein the display image information is generated by executing any one of the processes including the reduction process on the acquired image information.
  10.  請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記取得した年齢対応情報に対応する前記年齢が、子供又は成人を示すものとして予め設定された年齢閾値以下の年齢である場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が前記年齢閾値に対応して予め設定された低減閾値以上である前記低減処理、及び、前記コントラストの補正が前記年齢閾値に対応して予め設定された補正閾値以下である前記コントラスト補正処理、を実行することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 9.
    When the age corresponding to the acquired age-corresponding information is an age that is equal to or lower than an age threshold that is set in advance to indicate a child or an adult, the processing means corresponds to the brightness reduction corresponding to the age threshold. And performing the reduction process that is greater than or equal to a preset reduction threshold value and the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is less than or equal to a preset correction threshold value corresponding to the age threshold value. Image processing device.
  11.  請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記取得した年齢対応情報に対応する前記年齢が、成人を示すものとして予め設定された年齢幅閾値内の年齢である場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が前記年齢幅閾値に対応して予め設定された低減閾値以上である前記低減処理、前記コントラストの補正が前記年齢幅閾値に対応して予め設定された補正閾値以上である前記コントラスト補正処理、及び、前記年齢幅閾値に対応して前記画像全体の輝度を下げる輝度補正処理、を実行することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 9.
    When the age corresponding to the acquired age-corresponding information is an age within an age range threshold that is set in advance to indicate an adult, the processing means corresponds to the reduction in luminance corresponding to the age range threshold. Corresponding to the reduction process that is greater than or equal to a preset reduction threshold, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is greater than or equal to a correction threshold that is set in advance corresponding to the age range threshold, and the age range threshold A brightness correction process for reducing the brightness of the entire image.
  12.  請求項9に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記者が、高齢者を示すものとして予め設定された年齢閾値以上の年齢の者であり、且つ当該者が予め設定された眼の病気に罹っていることが、前記取得した年齢対応情報により示されている場合に、前記処理手段は、前記輝度の低減が予め設定された低減閾値以下である前記低減処理、前記コントラストの補正が予め設定された補正閾値以上である前記コントラスト補正処理、及び、前記取得した年齢対応情報に基づいて前記色を補正する前記色補正処理、を実行することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to claim 9.
    The acquired age-corresponding information indicates that the person is older than an age threshold value that is set in advance to indicate an elderly person and that the person has a preset eye disease. The processing means, the reduction process in which the reduction in brightness is less than or equal to a preset reduction threshold, the contrast correction process in which the contrast correction is greater than or equal to a preset correction threshold, and An image processing apparatus that executes the color correction processing for correcting the color based on the acquired age correspondence information.
  13.  請求項8から請求項12のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記年齢対応情報取得手段により新たな前記年齢対応情報が取得されたとき、前記処理手段は当該新たな年齢対応情報に基づいて、前記低減処理を含むいずれかの処理を、前記取得した画像情報に対して実行して前記表示用画像情報を生成することを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 8 to 12,
    When the new age-corresponding information is acquired by the age-corresponding information acquisition means, the processing means performs any processing including the reduction processing on the acquired image information based on the new age-corresponding information. An image processing apparatus, which is executed for generating the display image information.
  14.  請求項1から請求項13のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置において、
     前記色成分が、RGB(Red Green Blue)色空間におけるいずれかの色成分、又は、色相及び彩度を含む三つの要素からなる色空間における前記色相内のいずれかの色成分、のいずれかであることを特徴とする画像処理装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
    The color component is any one of the color components in the RGB (Red Green Blue) color space, or any one of the color components in the hue in a color space including three elements including hue and saturation. An image processing apparatus comprising:
  15.  請求項1から請求項14のいずれか一項に記載の画像処理装置と、
     前記表示用画像情報を取得して、当該表示用画像情報に相当する画像を表示する前記表示手段と、
     を備えることを特徴とする表示装置。
    The image processing apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
    The display means for acquiring the display image information and displaying an image corresponding to the display image information;
    A display device comprising:
  16.  表示手段に接続される画像処理装置において実行される画像処理方法において、
     前記表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する画像情報取得工程と、
     時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時情報取得工程と、
     前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる処理工程と、
     を含むことを特徴とする画像処理方法。
    In an image processing method executed in an image processing apparatus connected to a display means,
    An image information acquisition step of acquiring image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display means;
    A time information acquisition step of acquiring time information indicating any of time, day, month or season;
    A processing step of controlling the luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information to generate display image information, and outputting and displaying on the display means;
    An image processing method comprising:
  17.  表示手段に接続される画像処理装置に含まれるコンピュータを、
     前記表示手段に表示すべき画像に相当する画像情報を取得する画像情報取得手段、
     時刻、日、月又は季節のいずれかを示す時情報を取得する時情報取得手段、及び、
     前記取得した画像情報におけるいずれかの色成分に相当する輝度を、前記取得した時情報に基づいて制御して表示用画像情報を生成し、前記表示手段に出力して表示させる処理手段、
     として機能させることを特徴とする画像処理用プログラム。
    A computer included in the image processing apparatus connected to the display means;
    Image information acquisition means for acquiring image information corresponding to an image to be displayed on the display means;
    Time information acquisition means for acquiring time information indicating any of time, day, month or season; and
    Processing means for controlling the luminance corresponding to any color component in the acquired image information based on the acquired time information to generate display image information, and outputting and displaying the display information on the display means;
    An image processing program that is made to function as:
PCT/JP2015/072711 2014-08-12 2015-08-10 Image processing device, display device, image processing method and image processing program WO2016024579A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014164586 2014-08-12
JP2014164587A JP2016040581A (en) 2014-08-12 2014-08-12 Image processing apparatus and display device, and image processing method and program for image processing
JP2014-164587 2014-08-12
JP2014-164586 2014-08-12
JP2015-158195 2015-08-10
JP2015158195A JP6146443B2 (en) 2014-08-12 2015-08-10 Image processing apparatus, display apparatus, image processing method, and image processing program

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016024579A1 true WO2016024579A1 (en) 2016-02-18

Family

ID=55304206

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/072711 WO2016024579A1 (en) 2014-08-12 2015-08-10 Image processing device, display device, image processing method and image processing program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016024579A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108646969A (en) * 2018-04-27 2018-10-12 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 Image vision-control method, apparatus, computer equipment and storage medium
CN113838411A (en) * 2021-10-12 2021-12-24 深圳市优聚显示技术有限公司 LED display screen brightness adjusting method, system and equipment based on human-induced illumination

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001251641A (en) * 2000-03-06 2001-09-14 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Color television receiver and eyeglass for television watching
WO2004088616A1 (en) * 2003-03-28 2004-10-14 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
US20060152525A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-07-13 Woog Kenneth M Viewing screen color limiting device and method
JP2007003618A (en) * 2005-06-21 2007-01-11 Sharp Corp Display device and mobile terminal device
WO2007104309A2 (en) * 2006-03-14 2007-09-20 Andersen Soeren Ree A computer controlled light therapy apparatus
WO2014208254A1 (en) * 2013-06-24 2014-12-31 大日本印刷株式会社 Image processing device, display device, image processing method, and image processing program

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001251641A (en) * 2000-03-06 2001-09-14 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Color television receiver and eyeglass for television watching
WO2004088616A1 (en) * 2003-03-28 2004-10-14 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
US20060152525A1 (en) * 2005-01-13 2006-07-13 Woog Kenneth M Viewing screen color limiting device and method
JP2007003618A (en) * 2005-06-21 2007-01-11 Sharp Corp Display device and mobile terminal device
WO2007104309A2 (en) * 2006-03-14 2007-09-20 Andersen Soeren Ree A computer controlled light therapy apparatus
WO2014208254A1 (en) * 2013-06-24 2014-12-31 大日本印刷株式会社 Image processing device, display device, image processing method, and image processing program

Non-Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"ARROWS NX(F-06E", GAMEN NO IROMI NADO O IROIRO IJITTEMITA NODE MATOME, 19 June 2013 (2013-06-19), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://web.archive.org/web/20131007215225/http://tomaki.exblog.jp/20389339> [retrieved on 20151020] *
"Kore wa Nemureru", BLUE LIGHT TAISAKU APURI 'TWILIGHT' NO TSUKAIKATA, SETTEI HOHO, 6 November 2013 (2013-11-06), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://tabkul.com/?p=41970> [retrieved on 20151020] *
"Twilight", Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://sites.google.com/site/twilight4android/home> [retrieved on 20151020] *
NTT DOCOMO ARROWS NX F-06E INSTRUCTION MANUAL '13.6, June 2013 (2013-06-01), pages 128, 147, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/binary/pdf/support/trouble/manual/download/F-06E_E_01.pdf> [retrieved on 20151020] *
TOMOAKI NAKANO ET AL.: "Navigation-yo Display no Atarashii Hyoji Gijutsu", GEKKAN DISPLAY, vol. 5, no. 8, 1 August 1999 (1999-08-01), pages 27 - 32, ISSN: 1341-3961 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108646969A (en) * 2018-04-27 2018-10-12 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 Image vision-control method, apparatus, computer equipment and storage medium
CN113838411A (en) * 2021-10-12 2021-12-24 深圳市优聚显示技术有限公司 LED display screen brightness adjusting method, system and equipment based on human-induced illumination

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9289622B2 (en) Therapeutic light control system
US10778944B2 (en) Apparatus and method for enhancing human visual performance in a head worn video system
US11305690B2 (en) Vehicular adaptive lighting control system
JP4692528B2 (en) Image display device
JP5811228B2 (en) Image processing apparatus, display apparatus, image processing method, and image processing program
CN103957345B (en) Method and system for processing image signals and displayer
KR102296918B1 (en) Display apparatus, method and apparatus for controlling thereof
US20150116207A1 (en) Electronic device and control method for screen thereof
US9867962B2 (en) Display apparatus, and display control method and apparatus of the display apparatus
CN107945766A (en) Display device
CN107295248A (en) The image display and method for displaying image and storage medium of display image
US20140063045A1 (en) Device and method for displaying and adjusting image information
JP2007003618A (en) Display device and mobile terminal device
TW200826058A (en) A color mapping method
JP2011071680A (en) Video display device and method
JP4544948B2 (en) Image display control device
CN109101207A (en) A kind of display methods, terminal and computer readable storage medium
DE112020006208T5 (en) System and method for gaze-based illumination of displays
WO2016024579A1 (en) Image processing device, display device, image processing method and image processing program
KR20150119515A (en) Method of compensating an image based on light adaptation, display device employing the same, and electronic device
WO2011083603A1 (en) Electronic device, method for adjusting color saturation, program therefor, and recording medium
JP6146443B2 (en) Image processing apparatus, display apparatus, image processing method, and image processing program
CN103295558A (en) Display method and display device
JP2016040581A (en) Image processing apparatus and display device, and image processing method and program for image processing
CN111883072B (en) Screen self-adaptive adjusting method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15832102

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15832102

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1